User´s Manual PP 803, PP 806, PP 809 (Nov. 2003)

User´s Manual PP 803, PP 806, PP 809 (Nov. 2003)
User´s Manual
PP 803
PP 806
PP 809
Acknowledgements
EPSON is a Trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
IBM is a Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
ProPrinter is a Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Notes:
$
Photographs and drawings in this manual show the printer maximally equipped. It has
to be observed that the second tractor cassette and the manual sheet feeder for
PP 803 are options and do not belong to the standard delivery contents.
$
Samples of Personality Modules (PM) or emulations in this manual always refer to the
module equipped with parallel / serial interface which supports EPSON LQ and
IBM ProPrinter emulations.
Documentation of PMs equipped with different interfaces and / or emulations can be
found either on the attached CD-ROM or came along with the respective PM.
A Publication of
PSi Printer Systems international GmbH
Eiserfelder Straße 316
D 57080 Siegen
Federal Republic of Germany
Pub. No. 5112 991 19404
November 2003
Great care has been taken to ensure that the information in this handbook is accurate and
complete. However, should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any user
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, please feel encouraged to send us
the relevant details.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
Copyright © by PSi Printer Systems international.
All rights strictly reserved. Reproduction or issue to third parties in any form is not
permitted without written authorization from the publisher.
Safety Regulations
The printer PP 803, PP 806, and the printer PP 809 fulfill the safety regulations
according to UL 1950 and VDE (IEC 950) and CNA/CSA C22.2 / No. 950 for
computer systems.
The mains cable must be connected to a ground protected wall-socket. The
selected voltage of the printer needs to fit to the local voltage.
The power plug must be easily accessible at any time so that it can be
disconnected immediately in case of danger or for maintenance purposes.
Comme le câble de secteur sert de dipositif d'arrêt-urgence, sa connexion à
l'imprimante doit être tout le temps accessible.
Before installing the printer, check the surrounding conditions in which the
printer will be placed (see next page, Operating Environment).
During a thunderstorm you should never attempt to connect or disconnect any
data transfer cables.
The power supply should only be opened and checked by authorized personnel.
Repairs and maintenance may only be attempted by authorized personnel as
well. Repairs done inappropriately may cause damage and severe danger for
the user.
There are warning symbols to draw the user's attention to possible injuries:
This symbol is visible when the cover has been
opened. It indicates that the print head is extremely
hot after long periods of printing.
Ce signal de danger se présente quand le cache
derrière de l´imprimante soit retiré pour indiquer que
la tête d´impression peut être extrèmement chaude
après imprimer très longtemps.
This symbol is also located on the cover. It cautions
against touching the blade.
Ce signal de danger se trouve sur le cache supérieur
du massicot pour indiquer de ne pas toucher le
couteau.
I
Safety Regulations
Electromagnetic Compatibility
We certify that the equipment at issue,
Type: Printer PP 803, PP 806, and Printer PP 809
corresponds to the law regulations ruling electromagnetic compatibility of appliances (89/336/EWG) and, therefore, fulfills the requirements for conformity
marking with the CE-sign.
For standard printer with serial and parallel interface (Ser/Par PM) please note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
$
$
$
$
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from the
circuit to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For printer with all other interface please note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
inerference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
II
Safety Regulations
Shielded interface cables should be used with this unit to ensure compliance
with Class B limits.
Changes and modifications not explicitly allowed by the equipment's
manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Changes et modifications pas expressément approuvés par le producteur
peuvent dévaluer l'autorité d'opérer l'équipement.
Operating Environment
Avoid installing the printer where it is exposed to moisture or heat (eg. direct
sunlight).
$
$
$
Temperature:
Humidity:
Humidity with Automatic
Sheet Feeder (ASF):
+ 10 °C to + 35 °C (+50 °F to +95 °F)
20% to 80%
30% to 70% (ASF only for printer PP 806)
III
Safety Regulations
Power On/Off - Lever
To switch the printer on or off push the Power On/Off - Lever always down.
Power - On
Power - Off
Lifting the On/Off - Lever to the zero position won’t switch off the printer. Push
the On/Off - Lever always down for switching on or off.
IV
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XII
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XII
1.Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Delivery Contents Printer PP 803 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Delivery Contents Printer PP 806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3 Delivery Contents Printer PP 809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
1.2
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
Requirements to the location of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ Environment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ Preconditions for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ Power Requiremens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Remove Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
$ Re-packing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4
Installing thePersonality Module (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5
Mains Connection and Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.6
Ribbon Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7
Replacing the Ribbon Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8
Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1 Paper Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.2 Fanfold Paper Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.3 Manual Sheet Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-17
1.9
Test-Print Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.1 Sample: PRINT MENU PP 803 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.2 Sample: PRINT MENU PP 806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.3 Sample: PRINT MENU PP 809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4 Sample:CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.5 Sample: PRINT LETTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.6 Sample: PRINT LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
V
Table of contents
1.10 Connecting to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ Parallel/Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11 Installing the Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12 Emulation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
1-25
1-25
1-26
2.
Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 Ready Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.2 Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4
Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.1 To Activate the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4.2 To Confirm Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3 How to Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3.
Configuring the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1
What is Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2
Standard Configuration
3.2.1 for printer PP 803
3.2.2 for printer PP 806
3.2.3 for printer PP 809
3.3
Explanation of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Menu Tree PP 803 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Menu Tree PP 806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Menu Tree PP 809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5
Menu Item Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Test Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Select Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Paper Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5 Print Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VI
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-12
Table of Contents
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
3.5.13
3.5.14
3.5.15
3.5.16
3.5.17
3.5.18
3.5.19
3.5.20
3.5.21
3.5.22
3.5.23
3.5.24
3.5.25
3.5.26
4
Page Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perforation Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tear Off / Cut Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut Device (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutter Vertical Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AGC Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recall Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-21
Explanatiion of the Individual Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
$ Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
TEST MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
DEFINE MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
SAVE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4.1
TEST MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2
DEFINE MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
SELECT MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PAPER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PAPER EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PRINT POS. ADJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PAPGE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
FONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
VII
Table of contents
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHARACTER SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEFT MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIGHT MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERF. SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEAR OFF MODE / CUT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4.3
INTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ I/F TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ WORD LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ BAUD RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ PARITY BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ I / F BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$ DSR / CTS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
CUT DEVICE (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
CUT. V-POS LO / UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
AGC POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
RECALL FACTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
PROGRAM UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$
MENU ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
$ Preferred Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1
Cleaning the Platen and Surrounding Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
$ CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2
Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
$ Open the Front Cover of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3
User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.1 Print Head Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.2 Installing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
VIII
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
Table of Contents
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
7
7.1
7.2
Trouble Shooting and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
- How to Use this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Power-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
No Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Operation-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Print-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Print Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Diagrams for Failure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.8.1 Locking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.8.2 Ribbon Unfasten Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.8.3 Ribbon Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.8.4 Remove Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.8.5 Paper Jam TRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.8.6 Paper Jam ASF or Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.8.7 Gap Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Stacker Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassettes (ASF) (only printer PP 806) . . . . .
7.2.1 Checking the Delivery Consignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Prepare the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Installing the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5 Inserting Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-9
7.3
Replacement of the ASF Pick-up Rollers (only printer PP 806) . . . . . 7-11
7.3.1 To Remove the ASF Pick-up Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.2 To Install the Pick-up Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4
Cut Sheet Tray (only printer PP 803 / PP 806) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Sheet Feeder (only printer PP 803) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tractor Cassette (only printer PP 803) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Cutter (only printer PP 803) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5
7.6
7.7
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-15
IX
Table of contents
8.
8.1
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PP 803 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Printer Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3.1 Tractor Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.1 Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.2 V-Stacker Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.3 Manual Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.4 Tractor Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.5 Paper Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4.6 Cut Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2
PP 806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.1 Printer Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.3.1 Tractor Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.3.2 Manual Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.2.4.1 Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.2.4.2 Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette A (only PP 806) . . . . . 8-12
8.2.4.3 Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette B (only PP 806) . . . . . 8-13
8.2.4.4 Cut Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.4.5 V-Stacker Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3
PP 809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 Printer Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3 Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3.1 Tractor Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.4.1 Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.4.2 V-Stacker Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
X
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-15
8-15
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
Table of Contents
Appendices
System Interface Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Serial Interface RS 232C / RS 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Transmission Protocols and Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 DTR - Ready / Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 XON / OXOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Serial Interface with RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-5
A-7
2 Parallel Centronics® Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
2.1 Interface Characteristics - Connector Pin assignment . . . . . . . A-8
2.2 Transmission Protocol Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
2.3 Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
3 Shared Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Appendix B
Print Samples of Resident Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C
Character Set Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Appendix D
IBM ProPrinter Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Appendix E
EPSON LQ 2550 / ESC/P2 / Barcodes Quick Reference . . . . . E-1
Appendix F
Barcode Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Miscellaneous
Information for the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Appendix G
XI
Table of contents
Preface
About this Manual
This manual covers the printer in combination with an interface module (Personality Module).
The Personality Module (PM) is an integral part of the printer, and the type of
PM used significantly influences the behaviour or operation of the printer.
The structure of this manual is such that the operator is led step-by-step
through the various procedures. It starts with the unpacking and setting-up,
moves on to detailed instructions for operating the printer and ends with the
mounting of options.
The manual is divided into the following chapters:
1.
Getting Started
This chapter covers the unpacking and setting-up of the printer and the
installation of the PM (Personality Module) and ribbon cassette. By the
end of this chapter the printer should be fully functional and tested in its
primary form. It is not yet connected to the host computer system and no
options are mounted.
2.
Operating the Printer
This chapter discusses in great detail the operation of the operator panel,
all menu functions, and the general operation of the menu.
3.
Configuring the Printer
This chapter explains how to configure the printer so that it can
communicate with the corresponding system environment. Then this
chapter thoroughly describes the printer's operating controls. In the last
part you will find tables with the possible values of the menu items.
XII
Preface
4.
Description of the Individual Menu Items
In this chapter you will find a detail explanations of individual menu items.
5.
Maintenance
This chapter shows how to clean the printer and how to replace the print
head.
6.
Trouble Shooting and Diagnostics
suggests how to identify and correct simple problems.
7.
Options
This is a brief description of all available options. Supplements enclosed in
the packaging of options may be inserted here.
8.
Technical Data
All technical details or data about the printer can be found here.
Appendix
A. Interface Description
This chapter gives hints about possibilities to connect the printer to the
various computer systems and explains particularities depending on the
version of the operating system. Additionally, cable connection is
illustrated.
B.
Print Samples of Resident Fonts
C.
Character Set Table
All printer supported character sets are listed in this chapter.
D.
Control Codes
Quick reference for IBM Proprinter and IBM Proprinter AGM (4207, 4208
XL 24) Emulation.
E.
Control Codes
Quick reference for EPSOM LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Emulation.
F.
Control Codes
Quick reference for Barcode programming.
G.
Miscellaneous
$ System Manager Information
XIII
Preface
Conventions Used in this Guide
The following conventions are used:
Bold
Headlines and important information.
Note:
Contains special advice to facilitate handling.
Caution:
Contains important information to prevent damage
of the equipment.
[ENTER]
Key functions are always depicted in brackets or
you will find the symbol of the key e.g
.
Abbreviations and Acronyms
ASF
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette for cut sheets and form sets
DRAFT
Draft Quality
EE
Eastern European
HSD
High Speed Draft
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LQ
Letter Quality
MACRO
User defined group (1 bis 4) of stored parameter
NLQ
Near Letter Quality
PH
Print Head
PM
Interface (Personality Module)
Note!
The following chapters describe the three printers:
$
PP 803
$
PP 806
$
PP 809
The operation of both printers is mostly alike. In most illustrations, the printer
PP 806 is used. In case there are differences in the handling you will find the
note PP 803, PP 806, or PP 809.
XIV
1. Getting Started
1.1
Unpacking
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.
The package contains the printer (1), a box (2), attachments in bubble wrap (3),
and a box (4) with the ribbon cassette:
Note:
Save all packing material and boxes for future transportation of the
printer.
A separate box contains the interface, called "Personality Module", or
short "PM").
1-1
Getting Started
The box (2) contains the following:
$
$
$
Quick Reference Guide (5)
CD-ROM (6)
Power cord (7)
In the bubble foil you will find
$ one tractor cassette (10) in case of printer PP 803
$ two tractor cassettes (10) in case of printer PP 806 or PP 809
An additional package in bubble foil comes along with printer PP 806 and
PP 809 which contains:
$ PP 806:
$ the Paper Insertion Guide (8)
$ the Manual Sheet Feeder (9)
$ PP 809:
$ only the Paper Insertion Guide (8)
1-2
Getting Started
1.1.1 Delivery Contents Printer PP 803
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Printer (1)
Tractor Cassette (2)
Quick Reference Guide (3)
Power Cord (4)
Personality Module (PM) (5) (it is boxed separately)
CD-ROM 67)
Ribbon Cassette (7)
1-3
Getting Started
1.1.2 Delivery Contents Printer PP 806
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
1-4
Printer (1)
Paper Guide (2)
Manual Sheet Feeder (3)
Two Tractor Cassettes (4)
Quick Reference Guide (5)
Power Cord (6)
Personality Module (PM) (7) (it is boxed separately)
Ribbon Cassette (8)
CD-ROM (9)
Getting Started
1.1.3 Delivery Contents Printer PP 809
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Printer (1)
Paper Guide (2)
Two Tractor Cassettes (3)
Quick Reference Guide (4)
Power Cord (5)
Personality Module (PM) (6) (it is boxed separately)
Ribbon Cassette (7)
CD-ROM (8)
1-5
Getting Started
1.2
Requirements to the location of the printer
Environmental Conditions
$
$
$
Install the printer in an area away from any heat source, air conditioner, or
strong airflow.
Avoid installing the printer where it is exposed to moisture or heat (eg. direct
sunlight).
Avoid installing the printer in a dusty or humid environment.
Preconditions for Installation
$
$
Place the printer on the stand or a table.
When processing fanfold paper always place the printer with its front edge
slightly off the edge of the table.
Power Requirements
$
$
1-6
No special wiring is required. A typical office wall outlet is sufficient.
Do not plug into the same wall outlet other equipment besides the printer
such as coffee machines, copy machines, or air conditioners.
Getting Started
1.3
Remove Transport Lock
Open the rear cover (2) by pressing the two locking buttons (1) and swivel the
rear cover backwards.
Remove the transport lock (3) for the print head carriage.
1-7
Getting Started
Re-packing Information
To ensure maximum protection when transporting the printer, always:
$
$
$
$
$
Remove any installed paper handling option.
Remove the mains cable.
Remove the ribbon cassette.
Reposition the transport lock.
Pack the printer in its original packing material and ship in its original
package.
1.4
Installing the Personality Module (PM)
The printer is only operational when an interface is installed, called a
Personality Module (PM). The illustration below shows the standard PM with a
serial and parallel interface.
Note:
$
1-8
Never attempt to install or remove a PM while the printer is switched ON.
To avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge, do not touch the pins or
components of the PM.
Insert the Personality Module (1) with the component side upwards until the
connector fully engages. Hand tighten the two locking screws (2).
Getting Started
1.5
$
$
$
Mains Connection and Power On
Connect the printer to the mains using the power cord. First connect the
cable to the power cord socket and then to the mains.
Do not plug into the same wall outlet other equipment besides the printer
such as coffee machines, copy machines, or air conditioners.
The power On/Off lever switches the printer‘s power supply ON or OFF.
Note:
Press the lever always down.
Since the power cord serves as a safety cut-off, its connection to the
printer must be accessible any time.
When switched ON the printer performs an internal self-test which checks the
electronics, the print head carriage movement, and the interface. Power ON is
indicated by a green LED on the operator panel, the first panel message is
TEST.... .
If the message RIBBON UNLOCKED - CHECK RIBBON ... is shown, follow the
steps in on page paragraph 1.6 Ribbon Installation.
When the internal test has been completed successfully the display shows
READY 1 ELQ or LOCAL 1 ELQ if data have already been transmitted.
Note:
If the display shows anything different please refer to chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
1-9
Getting Started
1.6
Ribbon Installation
Note:
It is recommended to use only original ribbon cassettes supplied by the
printer manufacturer. Using other ribbons will void your warranty.
The following procedure describes how the ribbon cassette is installed into the
printer for the very first time. Section 1.7 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette is
applicable if the ribbon cassette is to be changed.
Note:
The prind head must always be in the park posirtion.
Open the rear cover (2) of the printer by pressing simultaneously the two
locking buttons (1) and swivel the rear cover backwards.
park position
$
Pull the right and left arm (7) of the ribbon cassette (3) to the bottom and
move the ribbon feed guide (4) into the fixing device (5) at the side.
3
7
5
4
7
Note:
1-10
The ribbon feed guide (4) has to slide into the fixing device (5). The
ribbon shall not be tensed.
Getting Started
$
Slide the ribbon cassette (3) into the printer.
$
Close the rear cover (2). The printer locks automatically the ribbon and
cover.
1.7
Replacing the Ribbon Cassette
Caution:
The print head may be very hot immediately after printing!
$
$
$
$
$
To install the ribbon, the printer must be powered on.
Put the printer into the Local Mode. (Press
).
Open the rear cover (2) of the printer by pressing simultaneously the two
lokking buttons, see picture on page before.
Swivel the rear cover backwards.
Remove Ribbon Cassette.
For further steps see chapter 1.6 Ribbon Installation.
1-11
Getting Started
1.8
Paper Loading
There are two or three possibilities for paper feeding:
$ Fanfold paper with the two tractor cassette (the second tractor cassette is an
option for printer PP 803).
$ Single sheets through the manual paper path input of the PP 806 which is
an optional device for printer PP 803.
$ Only for printer PP 806 automatic sheet feeder cassette (ASF-Cassettes)
are available as an option. For further information please refer to chapter 7.2
ASF Cassettes.
1.8.1 Paper Source Selection
The basic selections for PAPER SOURCE are:
$ TRACTOR (Default TRACTOR LOWER, indicated by U)
$ MANUAL
Select 'TRACTOR L/U' as paper source on the operator panel
The following diagram shows which keys to press and what is displayed on the
operator panel.
Power the printer ON:
KEY
DISPLAY
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
[MENU]
TEST MODES
[DOWN]
DEFINE MACRO
[ENTER]
ž SELECT MACRO
ž PAPER SOURCE
ž TRACTOR LOWER
ž TRACTOR L/U
ž TRACTOR L/U
[ONLINE]
READY
[RIGHT]
[DOWN]
[RIGHT]
[DOWN]
Note:
1-12
1 ELQ




U
U
1 ELQ
The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is
switched off. In order to prevent from losing your new settings you can
save them using the function SAVE MENU (see chapter 2.4.3 How to
Save Settings.
Getting Started
1.8.2 Fanfold Paper Feeding
Note: Ensure that all transport locks are removed.
$
$
$
The printer has to be placed at the front edge of the table or on the printer
stand as described in chapter 7.1 Printer Stand.
Remove the manual sheet feeder (1) of printer PP 806 (option for printer
PP 803, see also paragraph 7.5 Manual Sheet Feeder).
Insert the lower (2) or the upper (3) tractor cassette, or both.
Note: The second Tractor Cassette is for printer PP 803 an option.
1-13
Getting Started
$
Step 1:
The paper width will be adjust with the right tractor. The left
tractor is fix. Adjust the right tractor as shown in the picture below
roughly to the paper width.
Note:
Don´t move the tractor with open tractor cover because it may
break off!
1-14
Paper Loading
$
Step 2:
Open the tractor covers and insert the paper preferably into the
right tractor. Close the right tractor cover now and move the right
tractor including the paper to the left. If the the tractor pins are in
the centre of the transport holes close the left tractor cover.
Note:
The paper must be straight but not too tight!
Note:
The left tractor is fix such that the left transport holes properly
feed into the paper run sensor.
The print area can be shifted electronically with the menu item
PRINT POS. ADJ. (see also menu structure and description of
the individual menu items).
1-15
Getting Started
$
$
Step 3:
Only for PP 806 and PP 809: insert the Paper Guide (1) into the
right slot (2) and push it against the housing [1.]. Then insert the
left side into the slot (3) and shift it into the printer [2.].
The standard setting of the paper source is TRACTOR LOWER .
If the paper source must be changed follow the steps on the next
page.
Note:
The Paper Guide supports the paper feeding from the tractor into
the transport rollers of the printer. Such an optimum line
registration is achieved and prevent the paper from generating
waves which let the form slide off the tractor.
Insert the the manual sheet feeder for printer PP 806 (see next page) and
start for all printers the Test Printout (see paragraph 1.9 Test Printouts)
1-16
Paper Loading
1.8.3 Manual Sheet Feeding PP 806
$
Insert and connect the Manual Sheet Feeder (1) to the paper insertion
guide.
1
$
$
Select the paper source MANUAL using either the menu function or by
means of the corresponding command in your application program, see
chapter 1.8.1 Paper Source Selection.
Initiate a printout, see chapter 1.9 Test Printouts.
1-17
Getting Started
1.9
Test Printouts
There are four test printouts available.
$ PRINT MENU shows the current settings of all parameters and the contents
of the macros.
$ CONFIGURATION lists all available fonts and indicates the page counter
value.
$ PRINT LETTER produces a standard letter (ECMA-132) which can be used
for measuring the printer’s throughput.
$ PRINT LINES shows a pattern of all printable characters. Use this to check
the print qiality as well as the top and left margin.
The following steps show which keys to use to start a test printout.
The printer feeds paper from the defined paper source (default TRACTOR
LOWER).
KEY
DISPLAY
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
[MENU]
TEST MODES
[RIGHT]
[ENTER]
[ONLINE]
1 ELQ

ž PRINT MENU (or other printout)
ž PRINT MENU
U
PRINT MENU
U
(starts printing)
ž PRNITMENU
[FORM FEED]
TEAR OFF PAPER
(short displayed)
ž LOCAL
[ONLINE]
1-18
READY
1 ELQ
Paper Loading
1.9.1 Sample PRINT MENU for Printer PP 803
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 4.x
PAGE COUNT 00050
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
CUT DEVICE
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
64 KBYTE
NO
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values behind FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
1-19
Getting Started
1.9.2
Sample PRINT MENU for Printer PP 806
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 6.x
PAGE COUNT 00050
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
64 KBYTE
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 1 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 1 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 2 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 2 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 3 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 3 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values behind FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
1-20
Paper Loading
1.9.3
Sample PRINT MENU for Printer PP 809
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 6.x
PAGE COUNT 00050
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
64 KBYTE
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values behind FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
1-21
Getting Started
1.9.4
Sample: CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
FW-VERSION
C031 ISO 8859/1
C062 IBM SET 2
C100 CODE PAGES EE
CO32 ISO 8859/15
C063 IBM CODE PAGE
C101 CODE PAGES EE2
C061 IBM SET 1
C071 EPSON EXT. GCT
DATA
SAN SERIF
COURIER
SCRIPT
OCR A
ORATOR
ROMAN
SAN SERIF
PRESTIGE
SCRIPT
ORATOR-C
ORATOR
ROMAN
COURIER
PRESTIGE
OCR B
ORATOR-C
DATA LARGE
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
ZEICHENSATZ
:
202xxxxx
PAGE COUNT
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
NQ
NLQ
LQ
EPSON EXT. GCT
126
LQ
NLQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
1: U.S.A.
PRINTHEAD NEEDLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DATA
DRAFT
$ !"#$%&'()*+,-./01234567890:;<=>[email protected]
.
.
The value after FW-VERSION indicates the actual release of the firmware.
1-22
23
24
Paper Loading
1.9.5
Sample: PRINT LETTER
Eilzustellung
Norddeutsche Farbwerke KG
Herrn Dr. Grauert
Große Elbstraße 64
2000 Hamburg 4
Org. III 5/37
17.04.75
H-A
Volkmann
4 34
Vordruckgestaltung für den allgemeinen Schriftverkehr, für das Bestell- und Rechnungswesen
22.04.75
E i l t
Sehr geehrter Herr Dr. Grauert,
Sie können das Schreiben der Briefe, Bestellungen, Rechnungen usw.
sowie das Bearbeiten des Schriftguts rationalisieren, wenn die
Vordrucke Ihres Unternehmens den folgenden Normen entsprechen:
DIN 676 Geschäftsbrief; Vordrucke A4
DIN 677 -; Vordruck A5
DIN 679 Geschäftspostkarte; Vordrucke A6
DIN
DIN
DIN
DIN
DIN
4991
4992
4993
4994
4998
Vordrucke im Lieferantenverkehr; Rechnung
-; Bestellung (Auftrag)
-; Bestellungsannahme (Auftragsbestätigung)
-; Lieferschein/Lieferanzeige
Entwurfsblätter für Vordrucke
Diese Normen enthalten alle Einzelheiten für den sinnvollen und
zweckmäßigen Aufdruck. Wenn dazu bei der Beschriftung genormter
Vordrucke DIN 5008 'Regel für Maschinenschreiben' beachtet wird,
entstehen übersichtliche und werbewirksame Schriftstücke.
Die beifgefügten 6 Mustervordrucke zeigen, daß das Beachten der
Normen die künstlerische und werbewirksame Gestaltung der Vordrucke nicht ausschließt.
Da wir uns auf die Herstellung genormter Vordrucke spezialisiert
haben, können wir besonders billig liefern. Eine Probestellung
wird Sie und Ihre Geschäftsfreunde von den Vorteilen überzeugen.
Mit bester Empfehlung
NORAG
Druckerei und Verlagshaus KG
Herrmann
Anlagen
6 Mustervordrucke
Note:
By pressing the key
the print job will be interrupted and then with
the following key sequence
and
terminated.
1-23
Getting Started
1.9.6 Sample: PRINT LINES
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§
§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!
!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789
9!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012345678
89!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234567
789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456
6789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012345
56789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234
456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123
3456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012
23456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01
123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0
0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
z0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy
yz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwx
xyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
wxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
vwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstu
uvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrst
tuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs
stuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr
rstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopq
qrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnop
pqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmno
opqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmn
nopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklm
mnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijkl
lmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijk
klmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghij
jklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghi
ijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefgh
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefg
ghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdef
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcde
efghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcd
defghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabc
cdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZab
bcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZa
Note:
1-24
By pressing the key
the print job will be interrupted and then with
the following key sequence
and
terminated.
Paper Loading
1.10
Connecting to the System
Parallel/Serial Interface
$ Switch the printer and the computer OFF.
$ Connect the interface cable coming from the computer to the printer's
parallel (1) or serial (2) port.
The following values are default settings, see chapter 1.9.1 or 1.9.2 PRINT
MENU.
$
$
$
$
$
$
Word Length:
Baud-Rate
Parity Bit:
Protocol
DSR/CTS Mode
I/F Buffer
8 bit
9600 BPS
Even
DTR
Ignore DSR+CTS
64 K-Byte
After powering the printer ON both interfaces, serial and parallel, are available
for data transfer due to the shared mode. The port to which data is sent
becomes active automatically.
For changing the parameters, see Appendix A System Interface Description
1.11 Installing the Printer Drivers
$ You will find the printer drivers on the CD-ROM.
1-25
Getting Started
1.12 Emulation Selection
The following emulations are included in the PM Ser/Par:
$ EPSON LQ / ESC/P2
in Macro 1 (Default)
$ IBM ProPrinter XL 24
in Macro 2
$ IBM ProPrinter XL 24 AGM
in Macro 3
$ EPSON LQ / ESC/P2
in Macro 4
To change from one emulation to another, follow the procedure below. The example shows the keys to press along with the display information for a change
from EPSON LQ / ESC/P2 in Macro 1 to IBM ProPrinter in Macro 2.
Switch the printer ON. The display shows READY 1 ELQ.
KEY
DISPLAY
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
1 ELQ
U
[MACRO SELECTION]
MACRO 2
(hold the key down and the available marcos are scrolling in the
display and stop pressing with selected Macro 2)
[ONLINE]
READY
2 IPP
The information READY 2 IPP indicates the selected macro and the
emulation of this macro, for example:
1 ELQ
2 IPP
3 AGM
4 ELQ
Note:
1-26
Macro 1 with Epson Emulation
Macro 2 with IBM Proprinter Emulation
Macro 3 with IBM Proprinter AGM Emulation
Macro 4 with Epson Emulation.
A “Macro“ is a summary of application specific parameter settings. It is
possible to have a total of four macros, each with a different summary of
VALUE settings.
The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is
switched off. In order to prevent losing your new settings you can save
them using the function SAVE MENU (see chapter 2.4.3 How to Save
Settings.
2. Printer Operation
Most of the printer functions can be executed via operator panel as well as via
software commands from the host system. Some functions become only
effective via Operator Panel keys, for example: locking/unlocking the printer.
2.1
Operator Panel
The Operator Panel
$ controls the set-up for communication with the host computer;
$ controls various parameter settings;
$ allows manual control of the paper handling;
$ gives information about the printer's status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LCD Display
Online / Offline
Online LED
Lock / Unlock Ribbon
Lock/ Unlock Print Head
Macro Selection
Form Feed
Curser Keys for Navigation
in the Menu Mode
To enter the Menu Mode
To confirm / cancel a selection
The LCD Display (1) indicates the current status of the printer. If any error
occurs (e.g. UNLOCKED - ... CHECK RIBBON) the corresponding error
message will be displayed. The green LED (3) lights only if the printer is
powered on and in the Ready Mode.
2-1
Printer Operating
2.2
Function Keys
If the printer is powered on, the display shows READY 1 ELQ and the green
LED lights. The printer is in the Ready Mode.
The printer works in two different modes, the Ready Mode and the Local Mode.
To put the printer into the Local Mode, press the Online / Offline-key
.
Ready Mode
In this mode only the red [Online/Offline] key is active and the green LED lights.
By pressing the key the printer changes into the Local Mode and the green
Online-LED extinguishes.
Local Mode
Depending on the state of the printer the three upper left keys have multiple
functions. The functions are displayed by keeping the appropriate key pushed.
Release the key as soon as the desired function is displayed. For further
information see chapter 2.2.2 .
2-2
Printer Operating
KEY
[Form Feed]
DISPLAY
1
)
EJECT PAPER
INSERT ASF (only PP 806)
INSERT MANUAL (PP 806; optionally PP 803)
INSERT TRACTOR
INSERT TRACTOR U(pper)
INSERT TRACTOR L(ower)
PAPER TEAR OFF
PAPER PARK
FORM FEED
REV. FORM FEED
[Macro Selection]
MACRO 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
[Lock/ Unlock]
LOCK RIBBON / UNLOCK RIBBON
LOCK PRINTHEAD / UNLOCK PRINTHEAD
The following keys have only one function:
KEY
FUNCTION
[Online / Offline]
After pressing this key, the printer enters the
ONLINE or OFFLINE mode.
[Menu]
MENU key - to enter the Menu Mode at the first
level.
[Enter]
A selection can be confirmed. To cancel the
selection, choose another item and press
[ENTER] again. The selection becomes
effective by pressing the [ONLINE/OFFLINE]
key. An asterisk (*) appears behind the actual
displayed parameter.
1
) depends on paper source
2-3
Printer Operating
KEY
[Cursor]
[UP]
[LEFT], [RIGHT]
[DOWN]
FUNCTION
As soon as the menu mode has been activated,
the four keys can only be used as cursor keys to
move within the menu tree.
2.2.1 READY Mode
In the READY mode only the [Online/Offline] key has a function:
After pressing that key the printer enters the LOCAL mode.
2.2.2 LOCAL Mode
All keys have at least one function. If one key has multiple functions they can be
displayed by keeping that key pushed:
Note:
The corresponding display messages are shown on page before.
After pressing that key the printer enters the READY mode
Note:
After closing or opening the rear cover the printer locks or
unlocks the print head, ribbon, and rear cover automatically.
If the printer does not start the locking procedure after closing the
rear cover press the key in the following situations:
1) Rear cover is locked:
$ Short pressing: Unlock the rear cover and ribbon.
$ Long pressing: Unlocking the rear cover, ribbon, and the print
head.
2) Rear cover is unlocked:
$ Pressing the key: Locking the rear cover, ribbon, and the print
head.
2-4
Printer Operating
Single sheet:
$ only form feed function. Either the form is fed into print position or
is ejected.
Fanfold Paper:
1) Paper is in Park Position
$ paper is fed into print position.
2) Paper is in Print Position
$ paper is fed to the tear off position.
$ paper is fed into park position.
3) Paper is in Tear Off Position
$ printer performs a form feed
$ paper is fed into park position (for this function the paper has
to be torn off)
$ printer performs a reverse form feed
The four macros are displayed by keeping the key pushed. The
actual macro is displayed first. Release the key as soon as the
desired macro is displayed. This one will become the active one.
How to confirm and save the selection see chapter 2.4.3 How to
Save Settings.
Press the [Menu] key to activate the menu mode. The four arrows
(up, down, right, and left) can be used as cursor keys to move within
the menu tree. The menu tree is shown in chapter 3.4 Menu
Sturcture.
To leave the menu mode press this key again
With this key a selection will be confirmed. To cancel the selection
choose another item and press [Enter] again. The selection becomes
effective by pressing the [Online/Offline] key. The selection remains
active until the printer is powered off. If the selection shall be
available after power off it must be saved by means of the menu
function „SAVE MENU“ see chapter 2.4.3 How to Save Settings.
2-5
Printer Operating
2.3
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The LCD indicator gives information about the status of the printer. In general it
can be distinguished between:
$
$
ONLINE messages
OFFLINE messages
Note:
Messages which exceed the 16 character display, e.g. error messages,
are horizontally scrolled.
The green LED lights when the printer is in the ONLINE mode and the display
shows:
READY
1 ELQ
When the printer is in the OFFLINE mode status information, error messages,
or menu messages are displayed.
Example: The display contents after powering the printer on without a ribbon
cassette.
Because of the error case the printer switches into the Offline Mode.
Switch the printer on. The printer performs an internal test:
TEST
The green LED is flashing and after a short moment the following term is
displayed:
RIBBON UNLOCKED Note:
2-6
In case of an error the printer switches into the Offline Mode.
Printer Operating
And then, the message is scrolled:
- CHECK RIBBON.....
Insert the ribbon cassette and close cover, see chapter 1.6 Ribbon
Installation.
After the automatic locking procedure the printer switches into the ONLINE
Mode. The display shows:
READY
1 ELQ
In this state it is possible to use all keys.
2-7
Printer Operating
2.4
Menu Mode
All selectable features are accessible via the operator panel and combined in
the printer MENU.
This feature provides:
$ easy configuration (language, etc.)
$ quick parameter changes
$ activation of test functions
There are three entry points:
$ TEST MODES
(4 test printouts and a Hexdump-function are available)
$ DEFINE MACRO
(1 of 4 macros can be selected and its contents
defined)
$ INSTALLATION
(installation specific parameters can be defined)
SAVE MENU is another function at the first level of the menu tree which allows
to save all selections permanently in a non-volatile memory.
The menu is organized in three levels:
$ Level 1
Main Functions
$ Level 2
Subfunctions
$ Level 3
Parameters and values
Level 1 (main functions) is entry point into the menu.
There is only one main function in level 1 without an entry into a lower level,
SAVE MENU.
In Level 2 (subfunctions) menu functions can be activated or a group of values
can be choosen.
In Level 3 (parameters and values at the lowest level) all menu items can be
selected/activated.
2-8
Printer Operating
2.4.1 To Activate the Menu
To activate the menu please follow the next steps:
Press
:
The printer changes from the READY mode into the LOCAL mode.
The display shows:
LOCAL
Note:
1 ELQ
The second term identifies the active macro and the emulation.
Press
:
Now, the printer enters the menu mode at the first level of the menu tree.
The display shows:
TEST MODES
Note:

As soon as the menu mode has been activated the arrow keys are
useable as cursor keys to navigate within the menu tree (up, down, right,
and left).
Pres
or
:
Arrow down or arrow up are used within one level to shift menu functions into
the display. The keys have a wrap around function.
DEFINE MACRO

Press
:
The display shows:
ž SELECT MACRO 
Now, you are at the subfunction level.
Note:
Movement in both directions is possible. Arrow right is used to enter the
next lower level and arrow left is used to enter a higher level.
2-9
Printer Operating
Press
:
The display shows:
ž PAPER SOURCE 
Press
:
Now, you are at the third level. The display shows:
ž TRACTOR LOWER U
The default value for PAPER SOURCE is TRACTOR LOWER At the lowest
level, parameters and values, the asterisk (*) to the right indicates the actual
selection.
To change this parameter into paper source MANUAL, (PP 806; optionally PP 803)
press
.
The display shows:
ž MANUAL
Press
to confirm the selection:
The display shows:
ž MANUAL
To quit the menu mode press
2-10
.
U
Printer Operating
2.4.2 To Confirm a Selection
$ press
; the confirmed value is marked by an asterisk ( U ) at the last
position as shown in the picture before.
Note:
All cursor keys have an autorepeat function.
The menu mode is left either by pressing
FUNCTION level and then pressing the
or by moving to the MAIN
key.
A number of VALUE settings is summarized in a "Macro". Four macros are
available, each with a different contents of VALUE settings. The standard
emulations are assigned to the macros in following manner:
Macro
Emulation
1
Epson LQ ESC/P2
2
IBM Proprinter XL 24E
3
IBM Proprinter XL 24E AGM
4
EPSON LQ ESC/P2
Macro parameters can be tailored to specific application requirements. This
feature is highly beneficial in case of frequent changes between applications in
a multi-user environment. Instead of having to adjust the menu settings every
time before a particular application is started, the user just selects the macro
containing the pre-defined set-up configurations.
2-11
Printer Operating
2.4.3 How to Save Settings
The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is switched
off. In order to prevent from losing your new settings you can save them using
the Main Function SAVE MENU.
KEY
Note:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
[MENU]
TEST MODES
[UP]
SAVE MENU
[ENTER]
SAVING NOW
(display is flashing)
[ONLINE]
READY
1 ELQ

U
1 ELQ
The values of the "current settings" and the macro contents can be
printed using the function PRINT OUT.
LCD Display
Online / Offline
LED
Lock / Unlock Cover
Lock/ Unlock Print Head
Macro Selection
Form Feed
Curser Keys for Navigation
in the Menu Mode
2-12
Display
3 Configuring the Printer
3.1
What is Configuring
This chapter describes how to use the operator panel and menu settings to set
up or configure your printer, so that the printer and your computer system can
communicate correctly with each other.
Communication between the two requires that both, the computer operating system and the printer have the same communication settings or features. The
most important of those are:
$
$
$
$
$
protocol,
baud rate,
word length,
I/F type,
parity.
You may also need to change some of the printer's other features depending on
your hardware and application requirements, for example:
$ paper handling
$ text processing.
The MENU mode allows you to access the configuration memory. All settings of
the printer are stored in this memory and can be printed. The possible settings
are discribed in detail on the following pages. A short view of all Menu settings
you will find in chapter 3.5 Menu Item Description, and a detail descriotion in
chapter 4 Explanation of Individual Menu Items.
The standard pameter setting can be printed by using the function PRINT
MENU. The following steps show which keys to use to start this printout.
3-1
Configuring the Printer
Key
Diyplay
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
[MENU]
TEST MODES
[ENTER]
ž PRINT MENU
ž PRINT MENU
[ONLINE]
PRINT MENU
[RIGHT]
1 ELQ

U
U
After feeding paper from the defined paper source the printer starts to print.
When printing is completed the following message will be displayed:
ž PRINT MENU
[FORM FEED]
PAPER TEAR OFF
(short displayed)
ž LOCAL
[ONLINE]
3-2
READY
1 ELQ
Configuring the Printer
3.2
Standard Configuration
The standard Configuration (factory default values) is reflected in the following
pintout.
3.2.1 Standard Configuration for Printer PP 803
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 6.x
PAGE COUNT 50
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
CUT DEVICE
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
64 KBYTE
NO
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCEE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
92. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values after FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All this standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
3-3
Configuring the Printer
3.2.2
Standard Configuration for Printer PP 806
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 4.x
PAGE COUNT 50
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
8 KBYTE
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCEE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MANUAL H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 1 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 1 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 2 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 2 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 3 V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
BIN 3 H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values after FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All this standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
3-4
Configuring the Printer
3.2.3
Standard Configuration for Printer PP 809
PRINT OUT
FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx
FPGA 4.x
PAGE COUNT 50
INTERFACE
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR/CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
AGC POSITION
MENU ACCESS
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 BIT/S
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
8 KBYTE
24
FULL ACCESS
CURRENT SETTINGS
MACRO 1*
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
PAPER SOURCEE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER
PAPER EXIT
PATH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH
BATCH CAPACITY
PRINT POS. ADJ.
TRACT.L. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.L. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. V-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TRACT.U. H-POS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PAGE LENGTH
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
72 LINES
FONT QUALITY
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
GRAPHICS QUALITY
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
FONT
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PITCH
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
10 CPI
LINE
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
6 LPI
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM
EPSON LQ
CARACTER SET
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT
IBM SET 2
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
1: U.S.A.
LEFT MARGIN
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
1. COLUMNS
RIGHT MARGIN
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
165. COLUMNS
LINE MODE
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
LF=LF, CR=CR
PERF. SKIP
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TEAR-OFF-MODE
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note:
An asterisk (J) after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro
The values after FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.
All this standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function
RECALL FACTORY.
3-5
Configuring the Printer
3.3
Explanation of the printout on the previous pages
in the headline behind the term VERSION the revision level of the printer's
firmware can be found.
Then, two columns of hardware related settings follow:
INTERFACE - for communication between the computer operating system and
the printer it is necessary to have the same protocol settings.
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
I/F TYPE
WORD LENGTH
BAUD-RATE
PARITY BIT
PROTOCOL
DSR / CTS MODE
I/F BUFFER
PARALL./RS232
8 BIT
9600 Bps
EVEN
DTR
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
64 KBYTE
There is no automatic protocol sensing.
The last part of the printout is a list of all MACRO settings.
In this case MACRO 1 is marked with an asterisk (*) which identifies it as the
active macro.
Whenever you make modifications in the active macro without saving them you
will find the new settings under the heading CURRENT SETTINGS. Unless they
are saved, the modifications will stay active only until the printer is switched off.
When the printer is switched on again the macro settings marked with the
asterisk will be reactivated.
3-6
Configuring the Printer
3.4
3.4.1
Menu Structure
Menu Tree PP 803
1
) The next level displays:
BATCH
MANUAL
2
) Option
) only displayed if Cut Device
is selected
3
Note:
For details of the possible parameter settings see tables in chapter 3.5
Menu Item Description and the description in chapter 4 .
3-7
Configuring the Printer
3.4.2 Menu Tree PP 806
1
) The cassette types BIN 1 up
to BIN 3 are only displayed
if the ASF cassettes are
installed.
2
) The next level displays:
BATCH
MANUAL
Note:
3-8
For details of the possible parameter settings see tables in chapter 3.5
Menu Item Description and the description in chapter 4 .
Configuring the Printer
3.4.3 Menu Tree PP 809
1
) The next level displays:
BATCH
MANUAL
Note:
For details of the possible parameter settings see tables in chapter 3.5
Menu Item Description and the description in chapter 4 .
3-9
Configuring the Printer
3.5
Menu Item Description
The following tables show menu modes, submenus and parameters.
Precondition is: Access to all menu items is allowed. (MENU ACCESS = ALL)
Otherwise restrictions are to observed.
L
An asterisk ( ) indicates the factory settings. For detail settings see chapter
4 Explanation of Individual Menu Items.
3.5.1 Test Modes
Entry Point = TEST MODES
Selection
Function
PRINT MENU
Printout of the current settings, the firmware
version, and the page counter value
CONFIGURATION
List of all available fonts, the firmware version, and
the page counter value
PRINT LETTER
Produces a standard letter (ECMA-132)
PRINT LINES
Shows a pattern of all printable characters
HEX DUMP
Pintout including all control characters
3.5.2 Select Macro
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
SELECT MACRO
MACRO 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
3-10
U
Configuring the Printer
3.5.3 Paper Source
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Parameter
PAPER SOURCE
TRACTOR LOWER
TRACTOR L/U
TRACTOR UPPER
MANUAL (PP 806 and optionally for PP 803)
1
ASF BIN 1
)
ASF BIN 2
ASF BIN 3
ASF BINS 1/2
ASF BINS 2/3
ASF BINS 1/2/3
U
1
) ASF Bins only for Printer PP 806
The cassette types ASF BIN 1 up to ASF BIN 3 are only displayed if the ASF
cassettes are installed.
3.5.4 Paper Exit
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
 PAPER EXIT
Selection
Parameter / Value
PATH
BATCH
MANUAL
BATCH CAPACITY
BATCH CAP.
(range: ; 20 up to 600; steps = 20)
Note:
U
The menu item MANUAL for Paper Source or Paper Exit can only be
activated in conjunction with the optional Manual Sheet Feeder for the
printer PP 803.
The Manual Sheet Feeder is standard in printer PP 806.
3-11
Configuring the Printer
3.5.5 Print Position Adjustment
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
 PRINT POS. ADJ.
Selection
Parameter / Value
TRACT.L. V-POS
TRACT.L.
V. 0.0
(Range: -24.0 up to 99.9; Unit: 1/6 inch)
U
Tractor Lower Vertical Position
TRACT.L. H-POS
Tractor Lower Horizontal Position
TRACT.U.
V-POS
Tractor Upper Vertical Position
TRACT.U.
H-POS
Tractor Upper Horizontal Position
MANUAL
V-POS.
BIN 1
V-POS.
MANUAL
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
H-POS.
V-POS.
2
BIN 1
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
)
H-POS.
V-POS.
2
BIN 2
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
)
H-POS.
U
BIN 3
V. 0.0
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/6 inch)
2
BIN 3
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
)
Bin 3 Horizontal Position
1
U
2
Bin 3 Vertical Position
BIN 3
U
BIN 2
V. 0.0
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/6 inch)
)
Bin 2 Horizontal Position
BIN 3
U
2
Bin 2 Vertical Position
BIN 2
U
BIN 1
V. 0.0
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/6 inch)
)
Bin 1 Horizontal Position
BIN 2
U
2
Bin 1 Vertical Position
BIN 1
U
1
)
Manual Horizontal Position
U
TRACT.U.
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
MANUAL
V. 0.0
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/6 inch)
)
H-POS.
U
TRAKT.U.
V. 0.0
(Range: -24.0 up to 99.9; Unit: 1/6 inch)
1
Manual Vertical Position
MANUAL
U
TRACT.L.
H. 0.0
(Range: -9.0 up to 24.0; Unit: 1/10 inch)
)
) MANUAL PP 806 and optionally for PP 803
) ASF Bins only for Printer PP 806
2
3-12
U
Configuring the Printer
3.5.6 Page Length
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
PAGE LENGTH
72 Lines
7
(Range: 1 up to 144 lines)
3.5.7 Print Quality
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
 PRINT QUALITY
Selection
Parameter
FONT QUALITY
LQ / NLQ
(DRAFT for font DATA)
GRAPHICS QUAL.
STANDARD
7
WIN.LQ
180 DPI
WIN.NLQ
90 DPI
WI.DRAFT
60 DPI
3.5.8 Font
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Parameter
FONT
DATA
ROMAN
SANS SERIF
COURIER
PRESTIGE
SCRIPT
OCR B
OCR A
ORATOR-C
ORATOR
DATA LARGE
7
LQ / NLQ
LQ / NLQ
LQ / NLQ
LQ / NLQ
LQ / NLQ
LQ
LQ
LQ / NLQ
LQ / NLQ
3-13
Configuring the Printer
3.5.9 Pitch
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
PITCH
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI
17 CPI
18 CPI
20 CPI
PROPORTIONAL
U
3.5.10 Line
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
LINE
2 LPI
3 LPI
4 LPI
6 LPI
8 LPI
12 LPI
U
3.5.11 EMULATION
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
EMULATION
EPSON LQ
IBM PROPR.
IBM PROPR. AGM
3-14
U
Configuring the Printer
3.5.12 Character Set
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
 CHARACTER SET
Value/ Parameter
ISO 8859/1
ISO 8859/15
IBM SET 1 / IBM SET 2
1: U.S.A.
2: FRANCE
3: GERMANY
4: U.K.
5: DENMARK
6: SWEDEN
7: ITALY
8: SPAIN
9: JAPAIN
10: NORWAY
11: DENMARK 2
12: SPAIN 2
13: LATIN AM.
14: TURKEY
IBM CODE PAGE
1: PAGE 437
2: PAGE 850
3: PAGE 860
4: PAGE 863
5: PAGE 865
6: PAGE 858
EPSON EXT. GCT
1: U.S.A.
2: FRANCE
3: GERMANY
4: U.K.
5: DENMARK
6: SWEDEN
7: ITALY
8: SPAIN
9: JAPAIN
10: NORWAY
11: DENMARK 2
12: SPAIN 2
13: LATIN AM.
14: TURKEY
15: LEGAL
U
U
U
3-15
Configuring the Printer
Selection
Value/ Parameter
CODE PAGE EE
1: CP 437 GK
2: CP 851 GK
3: CP 928 GK
4: CP 855 CYRI
5: CP 866
6: CP 869
7: CP 852
8: KAMENICKY
9: ISO LATIN 2
10: MAZOVIA
11: CP 437 HUN
12: CP 852 SEE
13: CP 866 LAT
14: CP WIN LAT2
CODE PAGE EE2
1: CP 771
2: CP 773
3: CP 774
4: CP 775
5: BALTIC RIM
3.5.13 Left Margin
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
LEFT MARGIN
1. POSITION
(Range: 1 up to 16; Step 1/10 inch)
3-16
U
Configuring the Printer
3.5.14 Right Margin
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
RIGHT MARGIN
136. POSITION
165. POSITION
80. POSITION
132. POSITION
92. POSITION
(measuring unit 1/10 inch))
U
(only PP 806 / PP809)
(only PP 806 / PP 809)
U
(only PP 806 / PP 809)
(only PP 803)
3.5.15 Line Mode
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Value
LINE MODE
LF = LF, CR = CR
LF = LF + CR
CR = LF+CR
LF, CR = LF + CR
U
3.5.16 Perforation Skip
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Parameter
PERF. SKIP
YES
NO
U
3-17
Configuring the Printer
3.5.17 Tear Off / Cut Mode
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO
Selection
Wert / Parameter
TEAR-OFF / CUT
NO
TEAR-OFF 10 S.
TEAR-OFF 1 S.
CUT
10 S. 1)
CUT
1 S. 1)
CUT
1 S No FF 1)
CUT MODE ON 1)
U
1
) Only displayed if Cut Device is selected (CUT DEVICE = YES)
3.5.18 Interface
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
 INTERFACE
Selection
Parameter / Value
I/F TYPE
PARALL. / RS232
PARALL. / RS422
PARALLEL
WORD LENGTH 1)
7 BIT
8 BIT
U
1200 BPS
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
U
1
BAUD-RATE )
PARITY BIT 1)
3-18
EVEN
ODD
NONE
U
U
Configuring the Printer
Selection
Parameter / Value
1
2
PROTOCOL ) )
DTR
XON / XOFF
XON / XOFF + DTR
DSR / CTS MODE 1)
IGNOR. DSR+CTS
DSR+CTS ACTIVE
CTS ACTIVE
DSR ACTIVE
I/F BUFFER 1)
64 KBYTE
32 KBYTE
8 KBYTE
1 KBYTE
U
U
U
1
) Only indicated if the serial (RS232 or RS422) interface is selected.
) Switched automatically from DTR to XON/XOFF if RS422 is selected.
2
3.5.19 Cut Device (Option)
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
Selection
VALUE
CUT DEVICE
NO
YES
 CUT DEVICE
U
3-19
Configuring the Printer
3.5.20 Cutter Vertical Position Adjustment
Note: Only displayed if Cut Device is selected (CUT DEVICE = YES)
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
 CUT V-POS
Selection
VALUE
CUT. V-POS LO.
CUTTER V L.
0
(Range: -8 up to +8; Unit: 1/60 inch)
CUT. V-POS UP.
CUTTER V U.
0
(Range: -8 up to +8; Unit: 1/60 inch)
U
U
3.5.21 AGC Position
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
 AGC POSITION
Selection
VALUE
AGC POSITION
POSITION
24
(Range: 4 up to 82) (PP 803)
(Range: 4 up to 131) (PP 806 / PP 809)
U
3.5.22 Language
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
Selection
VALUE
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANCAIS
3-20
U
Configuring the Printer
3.5.23 Recall Factory
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
Selection
Function
RECALL FACTORY
All standard default settings of the firmware will be
restored but not saved.
3.5.24 Program Update
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
Selection
Function
PROGRAM UPDATE
A new firmware version can be down loaded from
the host system via the interface cable. All
parameters will be reset to their factory default
value.
3.5.25 Menu Access
Entry Point = INSTALLATION
Selection
Parameter
MENU ACCESS
FULL ACCESS
NO ACCESS
U
3.5.26 Save Menu
Entry Point = SAVE MENU
Selection
VALUE
SAVE MENU
SAVING NOW
U
3-21
4. Explanation of the Individual Menu Items
Main Functions and Entry Points into the menu
The following Main Functions are available:
$
TEST MODES
There are 4 test printouts and the hexdump function available. (For detail
information see chapter 4.1 beginning on the next page).
$
DEFINE MACRO
Behind this menu point there are all functions and parameters to define a
macro. (For detail information see chapter 4.2).
$
INSTALLATION
In the first subfunction named INTERFACE you can manipulate parameters
to enable communication with the host. (See Chapter 4.3).
$
SAVE MENU
Any desired changes to the default settings can be saved here. After power
on the new settings are activated.
While this function is operating the display flashes SAVING NOW.
4-1
Description of the Individual Menu Items
4.1
TEST MODES
$
PRINT MENU
This test printout shows the current settings of all parameters and the
contents of the macros. This printout is helpful for future reference and when
macros are to be changed. For detail see chapter 3.2 Standard
Configuration.
$
CONFIGURATION
This test printout lists all available fonts, contains the page count to identify
the actual number of printed pages, and gives information on technical
releases which are intended for service purposes. You will find a sample in
chapter 1.9 PRINT MENU.
$
PRINT LETTER
This test printout produces a standard letter (ECMA-132) which can be used
for measuring the printer's throughput. See a sample in chapter 1.9 PRINT
MENU.
$
PRINT LINES
This test printout shows a pattern of all printable characters. Use this to
check if the printer operates correctly. See sample in chapter 1.9 PRINT
MENU.
$
HEX DUMP
This function allows to analyze the data received by the printer. Control
codes are no longer executed, instead all data is printed in hexadecimal
format and as ASCII characters. Any non-printable characters, such as
carriage return are only represented as a single dot (.) in the ASCII list.
It may happen that the transmission of data to the printer will be interrupted
during Hex Dump. In this case, printing of data received after the break is
started on the next available line. The result is an irregular right margin
which is not an indicator for any loss of data.
4-2
Description of the Individual Menu Items
4.2
DEFINE MACRO
$
SELECT MACRO
To select one of the four macros which can be used for quickly changing the
printer settings for different applications. For example: Application A needs
fanfold paper with a top margin of one, application B processes fanfold
paper in a batch with a top margin of six. Simply by pressing Macro
Selection key
the macro containing the information for the specific
application requirements can be activated.
$
PAPER SORCE
The printer offers three choices for paper source:
$ TRACTOR (fanfold paper)
$ MANUAL (single sheet) (optional for printer PP 803; and a standard part
of the printer PP 806)
$ ASF CASSETTES (optional for printer PP 806)
They can be accessed either individually or bundled in a pool. Any
combination of cassettes can be selected.
Note:
$
Please refer to chapter 8 Technical Data, for detailed media
specifications.
PAPER EXIT
It is possible to define PATH and BATCH CAPACITY. The desired paper
exit can be selected via operator panel or software.
$
Parameters of PATH
$ BATCH default for fanfold (all printers) and cut sheet (PP 803 only)
$ MANUAL is for single sheet or form sets only; with output to the front
on top of the Manual Insertion Guide (for PP 803 optionally and for
PP 806 standard).
$
Values for BATCH CAPACITY are in the range from:
“ ” for no setting (which is the default selectiont);
20 up to 600 in steps of 20 pages.
4-3
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
PRINT POS. ADJ.
This function adjusts the print position in the current macro for the different
paper paths TRACT. L.V-POS, TRACT. L.H-POS, TRACT.U.V-POS,
TRACT. U.H-POS, MANUAL V-POS, MANUAL H-POS, ASF BIN x V-POS,
and ASF BINx H-POS (x = 1 up to 3) to exactly position the printout in
relation to the top edge of the form in use. It is meant to be a corrective
parameter to compensate variations in paper size and pre-printed material.
This parameter covers a range of:
$ fanfold vertical:
-24.0 up to 99.9 in steps of 1/6 inch,
$ fanfold horizontal:
- 9.0 up to 24.0 in steps of 1/10 inch
$ manual or bins vertical:
- 1.5 up to 24.0 in steps of 1/6 inch,
$ manual or bins horizontal: - 9.0 up to 24.0 in steps of 1/10 inch
where "-" is up the page and "+" is further down the page.
Caution:
$
4-4
The set up of PRINT.POS.ADJ. will become effective on the next
page of the form. Therefore, it is recommended to define
PRINT.POS.ADJ. as long as the paper is in the park position and
before starting the print job.
PAGE LENGTH
Page length is expressed in terms of lines within the range of 1 to 144 lines.
Any page length setting is based on six lines per inch, regardless of the
number of lines per inch selected in the line setting or defined by the
application.
The following table shows the number of lines for the most common paper
sizes:
Paper length in inches
Appropriate setting in no. of lines
4
24
1
4 /6
25
6
36
8
48
8 1/2
51
11
66
11 2/3
70
12 (default setting)
72
The page length setting is the basis from which perforation skip, TEAR-OFF
and margins are calculated.
An incorrect page length, therefore, leads to an incorrect perforation skip.
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
PRINT QUALITY
$ Font Quality
Four different font quality levels can be selected:
$ High Speed Draft (font "Data")
$ Draft quality (font "Data")
$ Near letter quality (NLQ displayed beside the font name)
$ Letter quality (LQ displayed beside the font name).
and
$ Graphics Quality
Four different graphics quality levels can be selected:
$ Standard
$ Win. LQ 180 DPI
$ Win. NLQ 90 DPI
$ WI. Draft 60 DPI
Different print qualities result in different print speed.
$
FONT
A font is a family of characters with the same style and size. The
appearance of the font can be varied by using attributes such as:
bold, italic, etc.
The fonts included in the PM are:
$ Data
$ Sans Serif
$ Prestige
$ OCR B
$ Orator-C
$ DATA LARGE
size,
Roman
Courier
Script
OCR A
Orator
see Appendix B for print samples.
Note:
The printtest CONFIGURATION lists all available fonts. The firmware
of the printer comprises also barcodes. Detail information for printing
barcodes can be found in Appendix F Barcodes Quick Reference.
4-5
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
Pitch
Defines the number of characters printed per inch (10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20 or
proportional).
Any pitch setting can be combined with any available font. In some cases
this might lead to a conflict with font designs. The pitch setting is, therefore,
a matter of personal taste.
$
LINE
Determines the number of lines per inch (line space).
$
EMULATION
The emulation determines the set of commands available for the printer (see
Appendix D and E). You can activate the following emulations:
$
$
$
EPSON LQ / ESC/P2
IBM PROPR.
IBM PROPR. AGM
The selected emulation is also part of the actual macro. With a change of
the macro (e.g. key
is pressed) it may happen that the emulation will
also be changed.
Be careful: Do not change the emulation within an application.
.
$
CHARACTER SET
The selected character set needs to be further specified by the corresponding national versions on the next level.
Detailed print samples are found in Appendix B and the Character Set
Tables in Appendix C.
If a different macro is selected the default character set may change as well.
e.g.
$
$
4-6
IBM PROPR. emulation has the character set IBM SET 2 as
default.
EPSON / ESC/P2 emulation has the character set EPSON
EXT.GCT as default.
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
LEFT MARGIN
The left margin is set in steps of 1/10". The first left margin position is 1/20"
from the left edge of the paper which means that the letter H in regular
"Data" font would be positioned 1/20" from the left edge of the paper. The
left margin can be set to a maximum of 16/10".
Left Margin
1 ......... 16
Right Margin
80, 132, 136, 165
$
RIGHT MARGIN
The right margin is set to print position:
80 for all three printers
92 only for printer PP 803 (default setting)
132 for printer PP 806 and PP 809
136 for printer PP 806 and PP 809 or
165 for printer PP 806 and PP 809 (default setting)
Always measured from the position of the first possible, not actual, left
margin setting.
$
LINE MODE
$ If LF = LF + CR is selected the printer performs a line feed and
additionally a carriage return (CR) for every line feed (LF) received via
the interface.
$ If CR = LF + CR is selected the printer performs a carriage return and
additionally a line feed (LF) for every carriage return (CR) received via
the interface.
4-7
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
PERF. SKIP
If PERF. SKIP is set to YES the printer starts to print after the specified top
margin and stops printing before the bottom margin.
If PERF. SKIP is set to NO the printer ignores top and bottom margin and
prints from the very first to the very last line. That means that on a standard
12" paper 72 lines are available for printing.
$
TEAR-OFF MODE / CUT MODE (Cut Device is an option)
There are three settings possible for tear off and four settings for cut mode:
Tear-Off Mode
$
$
$
NO
(default setting)
TEAR-OFF 10 S.
TEAR-OFF 1 S.
Cut Mode (only if Cut Device is activated)
CUT 10 S.
CUT 1 S.
$
CUT 1 S. NO FF
CUT MODE ON
When TEAR-OFF is selected the printer waits for one or ten seconds and,
unless further data are received, advances the paper to the first perforation
behind the text.
Regardless of this setting, whenever a change from fanfold to another paper
source occurs the printer will request the fanfold paper to be torn off before
the paper is moved into the park position. Furthermore, all settings can be
overruled by software (see command SPSIF).
The setting NO means, that neither automatic feeding into the tear off
position no automatic cutting is performed. It is appropriate for batch output
of continuous forms.
The setting TEAR - OFF 10 S causes the paper to move into the tear off
position if no new printing data have been received within 10 seconds. This
setting supports applications which do not close a print job by a form feed.
When the page is at the tear-off position and data transfer is continued
without having torn-off the page, the form is moved back so that printing can
resumed at the last print position. If the page has already been torn off
printing will be continued at the top of the next page.
4-8
Description of the Individual Menu Items
The setting TEAR - OFF 1 S causes the paper to move to the tear off
position when the print job has been completed by a form feed command
and no new print job has been received within one second. If the paper is
not torn off and new printing data are received the paper moves back into
the printer and printing is continued at the first line of the following page.
In case of setting CUT DEVICE = YES, the printer will always cut the paper
when a switch from one tractor to the other has been initiated.
The setting CUT 10 S causes the form to be cut if no further printing data
have been received within a print job for a period of 10 seconds. After
cutting, the paper moves immediately into the top of form position of the next
page. This setting supports applications lacking a programmed form feed
after completion of a print job.
The setting CUT 1 S causes the form to be cut if, after a form feed
command, no further printing data have been received within a print job for
a period of 1 second. After cutting, the paper moves immediately into the top
of form position of the next page.
The setting CUT 1 S NO FF has the same function as CUT 1 S but is
independent of receiving of a form feed command.
By the function CUT MODE ON the printer will cut continuous forms into
single sheets and feed them to the rear.
Note:
The application has to control page length. The page length must be
at least three inch, otherwise the printer is unable to through out the
sheet.
4-9
Description of the Individual Menu Items
4.3
$
INSTALLATION
INTERFACE
$ I/F TYPE (Interface Type)
The following types are available:
$ PARALLEL / RS232
$
PARALLEL / RS422
$ PARALLEL
In case the PARALLEL / RS232 or PARALLEL / RS422 interface type is
selected the printer switches automatically between the parallel and
serial interface. The first data received at the port determine which
interface port becomes active. The other interface port will be closed so
that only one interface is active at a time (for detailed information see
Appendix A Interface Description).
The factory settings for the interface type are: PARALL./RS232, 8 bit
word length, 9600 baud rate, even parity bit, DTR protocol, ignore
DSR+CTS, and 64 Kbyte Buffer.
$
WORD LENGTH (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)
Number of bits that represent a word; values are 7 or 8 bit
$
BAUD RATE (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)
Controls the speed of data transfer. Possible transfer rates are: 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps.
$
PARITY BIT (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)
The data transfer will be checked by an even or odd parity bit. The
values are: EVEN, ODD, or NONE.
$
PROTOCOL (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)
Selectable are: DTR, XON/XOFF, or XON/XOFF+DTR.
Note:
4-10
The setting switches automatically from DTR to XON/XOFF if I/F
Type RS422 is selected.
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
I/F BUFFER
Buffer size in Kbyte. The maximum (factory setting) size is 64 Kbyte.
$
DSR/CTS MODE (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)
Selectable are: IGNORE DSR+CTS, DSR+CTS ACTIVE, CTS ACTIVE,
or DSR ACTIVE.
$
CUT DEVICE
The Cut Device is an option. The standard setting is NO. To activate the Cut
Device set this parameter to YES.
$
CUT. V-POS LO. / CUT. V-POS UP. (only displayed if Cut Device = YES)
(Vertical adjustment of cut position)
This can be set differently for each paper source (lower and upper tractor)
and is meant to be a corrective parameter to meet variations in paper size
and pre-printed material.
The parameter covers a range of - 8/60" to + 8/60" of an inch, where "-" is up
the page and "+" is further down the page. The default value is zero.
Note:
If, for some reason, it is not desired to cut exactly on the perforation it is
very important to cut below the perforation of the printed page. If the
paper is cut above the perforation the remaining paper can easily bend
and cause a paper jam. Do not cut through a label as the blade would
get dirty by the glue.
The following table shows the possible values in inch and millimetres.
+/- 1
+/- 2
+/- 3
+/- 4
=
=
=
=
+/- 1/60"
+/- 2/60"
+/- 3/60"
+/- 4/60"
=
=
=
=
+/- 0,42 mm
+/- 0,85 mm
+/- 1,27 mm
+/- 1,69 mm
+/- 5
+/- 6
+/- 7
+/- 8
=
=
=
=
+/- 5/60"
+/- 6/60"
+/- 7/60"
+/- 8/60"
=
=
=
=
+/- 2,12 mm
+/- 2,54 mm
+/- 2,96 mm
+/- 3,39 mm
A higher value shift the paper up and such the cut position further down the
page. When you reduce the value the cut position is moved up the page.
4-11
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
AGC Position
AGC (Automatic Gap Control) is an integral part of the paper handling
capabilities of the printer. It is an automatic adjustment function which
ensures usage of various paper thicknesses at always optimal print quality.
The gap adjustment will automatically take place whenever paper is inserted
$ after the paper source has been changed
$ from park position
$ after Power On
$ after the printer has been in the STOP mode
$ an AGC command has been issued.
$ manual insertion
The reference point for the measurement of the paper thickness is the AGC
Position of the first print line. Default for the horizontal AGC Position is 24,
any position from 4 up to 82 (for printer PP 803) or 4 to 131 (for the printers
PP 806 and PP 809) in steps of 10 cpi can be selected.
An adjustment of the AGC Position is only necessary if a measurement at
the default position does not reflect the paper thickness of the area to be
printed on or if there is a paper edge (e.g. of a label) in that position (the
measuring process requires a plain paper-surface).
In addition to the automatic AGC function, measurements of the paper
thickness at various positions can be executed by the AGC command, or a
specific platen gap can be set using the PCC command. This is to meet the
requirements of forms with complex properties. For details see Appendix D
and E Quick Reference.
4-12
Description of the Individual Menu Items
$
LANGUAGE
The operator panel may display its messages in three languages. Select
one out of the following: ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, or FRANCAIS.
$
RECALL FACTORY
All standard default settings of the firmware will be restored. The contents of
Page Counter and the Paper-in Adjust will not be changed. Use the function
SAVE MENU if the standard settings shall be stored permanently.
$
PROGRAM UPDATE
A new firmware version can be down loaded from the host system via the
interface cable. All parameters will be reset to their factory default value.
$
MENU ACCESS
There are two possibilities to define the user’s access rights to the menu.
$ FULL ACCESS
All functions can be used (default)
$ NO ACCESS
The menu is not accessible at all. Only the menu
item TEST MODES is available.
Note:
It is the system manager’s responsibility to grant access to the menu
when NO ACCESS was selected.
4-13
5. Maintenance
Preferred Material
The following materials and cleaning lubricants are recommended when
maintaining the printer:
$
$
Lint-free cloth
Vacuum cleaner.
5.1
Cleaning Surrounding Areas
The user should clean the printer every six months or after 50,000 prints,
whatever occurs first. If you experience paper feed problems or if the print head
carriage movement is hampered, cleaning should be carried out more often.
Note:
The Page Counter (PGCNT) in the CONFIGURATION printout will inform
about the actual number of printed pages (see illustration on the next
page) .
5-1
Maintenance
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
FW-VERSION
202xxxxx
PAGE COUNT
126
C031 ISO 8859/1
C062 IBM SET 2
C100 CODE PAGE EE
CO32 ISO 8859/15
C063 IBM CODE PAGE
C101 CODE PAGE EE2
C061 IBM SET 1
C071 EPSON EXT. GCT
DATA
SANS SERIF
COURIER
SCRIPT
OCR A
ORATOR
ROMAN
SANS SERIF
PRESTIGE
SCRIPT
ORATOR-C
ORATOR
ROMAN
COURIER
PRESTIGE
OCR B
ORATOR-C
DATA LARGE
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
ZEICHENSATZ
:
NLQ
LQ
NLQ
NQ
NLQ
LQ
EPSON EXT. GCT
LQ
NLQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
LQ
1: U.S.A.
PRINTHEAD NEEDLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DATA
DRAFT
$ !"#$%&'()*+,-./01234567890:;<=>[email protected]
.
.
Note:
5-2
FW-VERSION indicates the revision level of the firmware.
21
22
23
24
Maintenance
5.2
Cleaning Procedure
$
Power the printer ON:
$
To open the rear of the printer :
$
Press
$
Press the left and right unlocking buttons (1) simultaneously and open
the rear cover (2).
to change into the LOCAL mode.
1
2
3
4
5
Locking Buttons
Rear Cover
Ribbon Cassette
Print Head (in park
position)
Print Bar
$
Remove the ribbon cassette (3).
$
Thoroughly brush and vacuum all accessible areas to remove any paper
particles and dust.
5-3
Maintenance
$
5-4
Open the front cover of the printer:
$
Remove the Manual Sheet Feeder (an option for PP 803; not applicable
for PP 809), Tractor Cassettes, and the Paper Guide (only for primter
PP 806 and PP 809).
$
Press the left and right plastic leads (4) and open the front cover (5).
$
Clean the paper pressure rollers and the transport rollers.
$
Clean the covers and the operator panel with a damp, lint-free cloth.
Do not use cleaning solvents or excessive amounts of water.
$
Insert the ribbon cassette (see chapter 1.6 Ribbon Installation).
$
Close the front and rear cover.
$
The printer automatically locks the ribbon and cover and changes to
READY mode.
Maintenance
5.3
User Replaceable Parts
The life time of the print head is specified being 600 Mio. strokes per
needle.
5.3.1 Print Head Exchange
Note:
$
$
$
The print head may be very hot immediately after printing.
Power the printer ON:
Release the rear cover (2) by pressing simultaneously the two
lockingbuttons (1) and swivel the rear cover backwards.
Press
until UNLOCK PRINTHEAD is displayed.
Now the print head is unlocked.
1
3
$
$
Locking Buttons
Ribbon Cassette
2
4
Rear Cover
Print Head (in park position)
Slide out the Ribbon cassette (3) to the rear.
Power the printer OFF.
5-5
Maintenance
5-6
$
Disconnect the print head cable (1) carefully by pulling the black plastic
holder (2) upwards.
$
The loose print head cable remains on the plastic holder (3).
Maintenance
Only for printer with Paper Cutter (3)
$ Pull the flap (2) to the front side.
$ Move the Paper Cutter (3) to the left until the cutter jumps out of its fixiation.
$ Grasp the Paper Cutter (3) at the holder (4) of the flap, move it a little bit to
the front side, and remove it to the right.
Attention:
Danger to injure one´s hand by the blade (5) !
For all printers
$ Slide the print head (1) out of the fixation support.
5-7
Maintenance
5.3.2 Installation procedure:
$ Put the new print head (1) into its fixation support and slide it in.
1
$
5-8
Insert the Paper Cutter (3) at the left side (6), shift it
slightly to the right, and press the flap (2) at the
right side behind the edge (7).
Maintenance
$
Put the plastic pin (2) into the hole (3) of the carriage for adjusting the
print head cable.
$
After finding the right position connect the print head cable by pressing
the plastic holder down (with strong pressure).
5-9
Maintenance
$
Insert the ribbon cassette (1) and close the rear cover (2) of the printer.
$
Power the printer ON.
Note:
$
5-10
The printer automatically locks the print head, the ribbon cassette, and
the rear cover.
Print out one test page to ensure that the printer works correctly after the
print head replacement. See next page.
Maintenance
KEY
DISPLAY
[OFFLINE]
LOCAL
[MENU]
TEST MODES
[RIGHT]
[DOWN]
[ENTER]
[ONLINE]
1 ELQ
ž PRINT MENU
ž CONFIGURATION
ž CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
(start of the print out)

U
U
ž CONFIGURATION
[FORM FEED]
PAPER TEAR OFF
(short displayed)
ž STOP
[ONLINE]
Note:
READY
1 ELQ
If it doesn’t work power OFF and open the printer again. Press print head
cable and its connector once more together. Close and power ON the
printer and repeat the test printout. For detail settings see paragraph 1.9
Test Printouts.
5-11
6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
How to Use This Section
1. Find the category to which your problem belongs. The problem categories
are:
$ Power-related Problems
$ Error Messages
$ No Printout
$ Operation-related Problems
$ Print-related Problems
$ Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems
For example, if the print appears very light on the paper, look into Section
"Print- related Problems".
2. Find the symptom description that most closely matches the printer
symptom. In this example you would look at the symptom "Print faint or of
poor quality."
3. Try the first suggestion under that head line.
4. If the suggestion does not cure the problem try the next suggestion.
5. If none of the suggestions enables you to continue printing or if the fault is
not listed contact your service office.
Each time the printer is switched ON the display indicates TEST while the
internal self-tests are run. If the test is completed successfully READY 1 ELQ
will be displayed. If an error message is displayed please refer to the following
section.
6-1
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.1
Power-related Problems
Power indicator does not light when power is switched On:
$ Check that the power cord and plug are securely fitted to the printer and to a
mains outlet.
$ Ask for the power connector connections (and fuse) to be verified.
$ Ask for the building electrical supply to be verified.
$ PM correctly inserted ?
6.2
Error Messages
After switching the power ON the printer runs a self test. During the test the
following messages may show up on the display:
Display
That means ...
Cause
No information, No power
POWER ON
LED not lit
or .........
$
Mains cable not connected.
$
$
PM not installed
PM not properly installed
LED lit but no
reaction
$
$
Print PSU defective
Print CU-DEV defective
Hang up in reset after
power on
After all tests have been passed successfully the following message will be
displayed:
READY 1 ELQ Printer is OK
or
BUSY 1 ELQ
6-2
$
Printer ready for operation
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
During normal operation the following error messages may occur :
Note:
In an error case the printer changes into the OFFLINE mode. After error
correction press
key to change back again into the READY mode.
If an error correction is not possible call your service agent!
Display
That means ...
Cause / Action
BUFFER OVERFLOW Handshake protocol
error
$
CARRIAGE ERROR
$
$
$
$
Horizontal drive without
function.
Not possible to find the
right print head position
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
CHECK TOF POS
Perforation isn´t
adjusted with the tear
off edge
$
$
$
$
ELECTR-FAN ERROR Fan error on electronic $
board
$
Check CTR - CTS or
XON/XOFF protocol
Check connector
Repeat data transfer
Paper jam
Print gap incorrect
PCC-value too low
Ribbon feed guide isn´t
aligned with print head
Horizontal drive blocked
Encoder strip not in
correct position
Encoder strip is dusty
Encoder strip missing
Horizontal motor fault
Print CU-DEV defective
AGC procedure on not
workable position
No AGC ADJUST after
print head replacement
Adjust the perforation of
the form with the tear off
edge by pulling the paper
forwards or backwards
and press
Check if print head is in its
park positon
Ribbon cassette correctly
installed ?
see also diagram 6.8.5
Paper Jam TRF
Press
key again
Hardware error; call
service
6-3
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Display
That means ...
Cause / Action
FRAMING ERROR
Protocol error serial
interface
$
GAP ERROR
Print gap incorrect,
green ribbon support
not in right position.
Value of AGC not
correct.
$
$
$
Check protocol setting of
printer and host
Repeat data transfer
$
Printer not locked
Wrong distance between
print head and print bar
Pins of the green ribbon
support broken
Check if print head is in its
park positon
AGC sensor defective
See also diagram
6.8.7 Gap Error
Error still there call service
$
$
$
$
LOCK COVER
Housing will be locked
$
Wait
LOCKING PRINTH.
Print head will be
locked
$
Wait
LOCKING RIBBON
Ribbon will be locked
$
Wait
LOCK PRINTHEAD
Print head mus be
locked
$
Press
head
to lock the print
LOCK RIBBON
Ribbon must be locked $
Press
ribbon
to lock the
MOTOR FAN ERROR
H-motor fan error
PAPER JAM ASF
(only printer PP 806)
There are obstructions $
$
in the paper path
$
$
PAPER JAM MANUAL There are obstructions $
$
in the paper path
$
6-4
Press
key again
Hardware error; call
service
Remove any obstacles
See also diagram
6.8.6 Paper Jam ASF
Remove any obstacles
Close front cover
See also diagram
6.8.6 Paper Jam Manual
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Display
That means ...
PAPER JAM TRF
Tractor cassette:
$ Feeding incorrect
$ No paper feeding
$ Not enough feeding
$ Too much feeding
by tearing off
After power on:
$ No paper inserted
PARITY ERROR
PRINTHEAD ERR.
Protocol error serial
interface
Cause / Action
$
$
$
Check paper path
Correct paper position?
Paper movement wrong
$
$
$
Close front cover
Insert paper
See also diagram 6.8.5
Paper Jam TRF
$
Check protocol setting of
printer and host
Repeat data transfer
$
Problems with the print $
$
head incline
$
PRINTH. UNLOCKED
In this situation the
print head is
exchangeable
$
$
No ribbon run
Pins on print head
carriage defective; call
Service
Unlock print head and
lock it again (see diagram
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)
exchange printhead if
necessary, insert ribbon,
and close cover
Close cover to lock print
head
PRINTH. UNLOCKED - Cover not closed
COVER OPEN
correctly
$
Close cover to lock print
head
PROCESS TIMEOUT
Firmware error
$
$
$
Press
key again
Switch printer off and on
Error still there, call
service
REMOVE PAPER
The paper sensor is
covered
$
$
Remove paper
Close front cover
RIBBON ERROR
Ribbon problems
$
$
Unlock printer
Open rear cover to unlock
printer
Check ribbon cassette
$
RIBBON UNLOCKED
Ribbon is free to
exchange
$
$
exchange ribbon and
close cover
Close cover to lock ribbon
6-5
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Display
That means ...
Cause / Action
RIBBON UNLOCKED - $
CARRIAGE ERROR
Horizontal drive
without function
$
$
$
Open printer
Check ribbon
Check if print head is in its
park positon
$
Printer locking
procedure faulty
$
Lock printer (see diagram
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)
No ribbon cassette
detected
$
$
Check ribbon cassette
Move print head into park
position
$
Printer unlocked
$
Lock printer (see diagram
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)
RIBBON UNLOCKED - $
COVER OPEN
Cover not closed
correctly
$
Close cover to lock ribbon
RIBBON UNLOCKED - $
GAP ERROR
Print gap incorrect,
green ribbon
support not in right
position.
Value of AGC not
correct.
$
$
Printer not locked
Wrong distance between
print head and print bar
Pins of the green ribbon
support broken
Check if print head is in its
park positon
AGC sensor defective
See also diagram
6.8.7 Gap Error
Error still there call service
RIBBON UNLOCKED - $
CHECK RIBBON ...
$
$
$
$
$
$
RIBBON UNLOCKED - Ribbon problems
RIBBON ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
$
$
$
$
Problems with the
system or the firmware $
Open printer
Check ribbon cassette
Lock printer (see diagram
6.8.1 Locking Procedur
or 6.8.3 Ribbon Error)
Switch printer off and on
Error still there, call
service
UNLOCK PRINTHEAD Printhead must be
unlocked
$
Press
to unlock the
print head
UNLOCK RIBBON
$
Press
to ulock the
ribbon cassette
$
wait
Ribbon cassette must
be unlocked
UNLOCKING PRINTH. Printhead will be
unlocked
6-6
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Display
That means ...
UNLOCKING RIBBON Ribboncassette will be
unlocked
6.3
Cause / Action
$
wait
No Printout
$
Self-test printout does not start
$ Make sure that you have closed the cover.
$ Check if paper is loaded in the printer.
$ Refer to paragraph 1.8 Paper Loading.
$
Printing does not start
$ Make sure that the READY or BUSY message is displayed. If there is a
different message displayed please look into the above error message
table.
$ Make sure that the printer is connected to the host computer. (Refer to
paragraph 1.10 Connecting to the System). Make sure that connectors
are properly fixed at both ends.
$ Make sure that the printer is receiving data from the host computer.
$ Make sure that the correct protocol is enabled. (Refer to page and
appendix A Interface Description).
$ Make sure that you have selected the correct port (if the shared mode
has not been selected).
$ Make sure that paper is loaded.
$ Make sure that the ribbon is installed.
$ Examine the ribbon path.
$ The ribbon feed guides are not in the right posotion (see paragraph
1.6 Ribbon Installation)
$
Fanfold paper does not advance
$ Make sure that the right paper tractor is selected.
$
Single sheet paper does not advance (only PP 803 or PP 806)
$ Make sure that the paper source MANUAL (an option for PP 803) or
BIN x (x = 1 up to 3) is selected.
Note: Bins are only for printer PP 806.
6-7
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.4
Operation-related Problems
$
Paper is not positioned at perforation for tear-off
$ Select the correct form length using the Set-up feature.
$ Reset top of form by moving the paper into park position.
$
Paper tears or jams
$ Examine the paper path; remove any obstacles
$ Is the paper too loose or too tight between the tractors?
$ If the transport holes are deformed at their outer edges, the paper is too
taut.
$ If the paper rises between the tractors it is too loose.
$ Readjust the tractor spacing so that the paper lies smoothly but without
any tension.
$ Ensure that the paper is horizontally aligned on the pins.
$ Paper moves out of one tractor.
$
Parking paper and resetting top of form
$ Tear off the paper at the perforation.
$ Press
.
$ Press
until the paper is in the park position.
$ Press
. Printing will resume at the top of the next form.
$
Print head carriage does not move smoothly / does not move at all
$ Examine the paper path. Remove any obstacles.
$ Examine the carriage area for obstacles. Remove where necessary.
Press the
key when the paper path is cleared.
$ Make sure that the transport lock has been removed.
$
Single sheets are skewed (only PP 803 or PP 806)
$ Adjust ASF cassette paper guides (only printer PP 806). You will find
more information in chapter 7.2 ASF Cassette.
$ Adjust manual paper insertion (option for PP 803)
6-8
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.5
Print-related Problems
$
Print faint or of poor quality
$ Do you use the right paper? See Chapter 8 Technical Data which contains the paper specification. Change the paper if it does not comply to
this specification.
$ Does the ribbon need to be changed? Replace it by a new one if
necessary.
$ Is the ribbon cassette properly installed?
$ Ribbon path not o.k. ?
$ Print gap incorrect. Press
twice.
$ Coppies not dark enough. Don´t use old action paper!
$
Characters are not printed evenly or are not uniform in pitch
$ Examine the paper path for dirt or other obstacles that may cause the
gap between print head and platen to vary. Remove the obstacles.
$
Print lines overlap
$ Examine the paper path for dirt or other obstacles. Remove the
obstacles.
$
Part of printed text is missing (loss of data)
$ If you are using Serial communication channel check the buffer control
setting in Set-up.
$ Check the data flow control setting on the host computer.
6-9
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
If the printout or the character set is not correct the following procedure can help
to clear the situation.
Action
Result
Check
Select and start PRINT
TEST 1
No print image or
printout not complete
$
$
$
Stop SELF TEST and
start external printing
No printing starts
$
$
Printer ONLINE
READY
Interface cable for
proper connection
Interface selection
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Emulation
Character set
National version
Word length
Baud rate
Parity bit
Protocol
$
Some characters not
correct
Font and/or pitch faulty $
$
$
Problem still there
6-10
PAPER SOURCE
selection
Ribbon condition
Print head condition
$
Font
Pitch
Line space
Call service
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.6
Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems
$
Ribbon Problems
$ Make sure that the ribbon is:
$ Properly tight
$ Not worn out or dry
$ Not torn or damaged in any other way
$ Not jammed
$ Ribbon turned over ?
$
Carriage does not move smoothly
$ Examine the paper path. Remove any obstacles. Check that all packing
material is removed.
$ Examine the carriage area for obstacles. Remove where necessary.
6.7
Print Tests
There are four different print tests as well as one interface test built into the
printer.
Note:
Detailed information about the print tests you will find in chapter 1.9 Test
Printouts.
6-11
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8
Diagrams for Failure Analysis
6.8.1 Locking Procedure
Error message:
RIBBON UNLOCKED CHECK RIBBON ...
Close rear cover
LOCAL
displayed ?
Yes
Check ribbon cassette and
move printhead into park
position
No
RIBBON UNLOCKED CARRIAGE ERROR
Open the rear cover.
Ribbon correctly inserted ?
Is the green ribbon feed guide
locked into the fixing device.
(park position) ?
Clean the encoder strip and
control the position.
RIBBONUNLOCKED RIBBON ERROR Open rear cover, remove
ribbon cassette and insert it
again.
Press
to continue
RIBBON UNLOCKED GAP ERROR
Open the rear cover
Ribbon correctly inserted ?
Is the green ribbon feed guide
locked into the fixing device.
(park position) ?
Green ribbon feed guide below
the print head ?
Pins of the green ribbon
support broken ?
Note:
6-12
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.2 Ribbon Unfasten Procedure
Note:
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Print head
park position
Open rear cover
Rear cover
Print head in
park position?
No
Move print head to
park position
Yes
Is it
possible to
remove the ribbon
cassette ?
No
Close rear cover
Yes
OK ?
No see 6.8.1 Locking
Procedure
Yes
No
OK ?
Yes
New
ribbon cassette
required ?
No Fix ribbon feed guide into the
fixing device at park position.
Yes
Replace the ribbon
casstte
Call Service
Close rear cover
Press
to continue
6-13
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.3 RIBBON ERROR
That means, that the printer has tried to tense the ribbon and to fix the ribbon
feed guide into the fixing device. But there are still problems with the ribbon.
Note:
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Print head
park position
Open rear cover
Check:
- Ribbon
- Paper path
Rear cover
Open rear cover
again: ckeck position
of the ribbon cassette
or change it
Close rear cover
LOCAL
displayed?
Yes
Press
to continue
No
Print head in
park pos.?
No
Carefully move print
head to park position
1)
Yes
Insert ribbon
cassette
1) Park Postition: Print Head is at the most right side of the printer. (The view is
from the front of the printer.)
6-14
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.4 REMOVE PAPER
That means, that a sensor isn’t free from any obstacles:
$ Paper remains are in the paper path.
$ Front cover isn’t closed entirely.
$ Sunlight shines directly to a sensor.
$ Clean the sensors 1, 2 and 3 carefully.
view: front cover opened
Paper in
Sensor (3)
LED (1)
Paper Detection Sensor (2)
Remove paper
press
READY
displayed?
Yes
No
Front
cover open?
No
Open front and rear
cover
clean paper path /
sensor 1, 2, and 3
carefully
Yes
Close front cover
Close front and
rear cover
Insert paper
Insert paper
Press
to continue
6-15
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.5 PAPER JAM TRF (Tractor Feed)
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.
Note:
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Visible paper
jam ?
Press
CHECK TOF POS
displayed
No
Yes
Perforation
No
adjusted with Tear
Off Edge ?
Open rear cover
Remove paper
entirely.
Remove any
obstructions.
Yes
Adjust the perforation of
the page by pulling the
paper forwards or
backwards with the
Tear Off Edge
Close cover
Paper jam
once more?
No
Yes
Possible to
remove ribbon ?
Yes
Remove paper and
any obstructions
entirely.
Insert ribbon
cassette.
Close cover
6-16
No
Release ribbon
cassette
Insert paper again
Press
to continue
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.6 PAPER JAM ASF or MANUAL
Note: ASF only for PP 806; MANUAL is an option for PP 803 and not
applicable for PP 809
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.
Note:
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Remove paper
press
to
continue
READY
displayed ?
No
Yes
Possible to
remove ribbon ?
Load paper
Yes
Press
to continue printing
No
See 6.8.2 Ribbon
Unfasten Procedure
Remove paper and
any obstructions
entirely.
Insert ribbon
cassette.
Close cover
Paper
jam again ?
Yes
No
Press
to continue printing
6-17
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
6.8.7 GAP ERROR
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.
Note:
Remove the ribbon cassette only when the print head is in park position.
Print head
park position
Open rear cover
Rear cover
Possible to
remove ribbon?
No See 6.8.2 Ribbon
Unfasten
Procedure
Yes
Remove paper and
any obstructions
entirely.
Insert ribbon cassette.
Close cover
Press
to continue
Error
message again?
Yes
Call service
6-18
No
Continue printing
7 Options
7.1
Printer Stand
7.1.1 Printer Stand PP 803 / PP 806 / PP 809
Put the printer onto the stand:
$ Look at the rear of the printer and put the metal bar (1) underneath the
flange-rail (2) of the stand (3).
7-1
Options
$
The printer is tightly locked with the stand.
5
Note:
7-2
The stand with a shelf for lower tractor (4) and a shelf for upper
tractor (5) is an option.
Options
7.1.2 Stacker Option PP 803 / PP 806 / PP 809
The Stacker Option guides the begin orf the form to lay down fanfold paper in
the best manner.
PP 803
PP 806 / PP 809
7-3
Options
7.2
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassettes (ASF) (only printer PP 806)
7.2..1 Checking the Delivery Contents
The printer can be operated with up to three ASF cassettes. The box comprises
following parts:
$ Cassette (1)
$ Paper support (2)
$ Forms guide (3) (already mounted)
Two different types of ASF cassettes are available.
$ Type A for regular paper and form sets
$ Type B for thick paper types, heavy form sets, and envelopes
(A sticker with an envelope maks the ASF cassette B)
7-4
Options
7.2.2 Prepare the ASF Cassettes
$ Mount the paper support (2) onto the cassette.
7-5
Options
7.2.3 Installing the ASF Cassettes
$ Push the tabs (1) of the cassette into the slots (3) of the printer or of another
ASF cassette until they engage.
Note:
$
$
7-6
Be careful not to damage the contacts (2) of the cassette while
installing.
Up to three ASF cassettes can be installed at any time to enable
processing of different paper types and formats simultaneously.
Options
The position of each cassette is dependent on the paper length to be
processed. The cassette with the shortest paper needs to be mounted first
because the distance between the pick-up rollers of the cassette and the push
rollers inside the printer is the shortest at position '1'. For example, if envelopes
are to be processed cassette type B must be cassette '1'.
Cassette Position
1 (first mounted)
2
3 (last mounted)
Note:
Minimum Paper Length
104 mm (4,08 “)
200 mm (7.87 “)
290 mm (11.42 “)
For detail description see chapter 8 Tecnical Data
7-7
Options
7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette
Remove the ASF cassette (1) from the printer by drawing back both release
levers (2).
Note:
7-8
To remove all AFS cassettes together release only the ASF cassette in
position 1. If the ASF cassettes shall be removed individually start the
removal procedure with the last mounted ASF cassette.
Options
7.2.5 lnserting Paper
The ASF cassette A can be loaded with up to 180 sheets of 80g/m² (21 lb/ream)
paper. Cassette B can be loaded with up to 40 envelopes.
Paper that is intended for use with an ASF cassette must be unpacked and
acclimatized within the printer environment for at least 24 hours prior to loading.
When loading paper for the first time or changing to another format, the ASF
cassette needs to be adapted to the paper size. This can be done while the
ASF is attached to the printer.
$
Squeeze the ASF cassettes levers (2) together, until the cassette
automatically opens its load position.
$
lf required pull up and release the locking levers (1) and adjust the paper
guides (3) to the width of the paper to be loaded.
$
Align the left hand edge of the paper with the center marker of the alignment
scale (4)
Note:
Aligning the edge of the paper with any of the other markers, left or right,
will move the margin right or left. Each rnarker represents 1/10".
$
Fix paper guides (3) in position by pushing the levers (1) down.
$
Manually fan the paper to separate the individual sheets to remove any
static charge.
$
Insert the paper between the guides.
Note:
For 80g/m² (21 ib/ream) paper the paper tension lever (5) should be
positioned at 0.
$
Pull the ASFcassette lever (2) to return it into the operating position.
$
Mount the manual sheet feeder (6) or the cut sheet tray (see paragraph 7.4
Cut Sheet Tray) for the paper output.
7-9
Options
$
Select paper source BIN 1, 2, or 3 (see paragraph 3.5.3 Paper Source).
Note:
7-10
Change the pressure off the pick-up rolls by loosen lever (2) if paper in
use is more or less than 80 g/m².
Move tension lever (5) towards - for lighter and + or ++ for heavier paper.
Options
7.3
Replacement of the ASF Pick-up Rollers (only printer PP 806)
The ASF pick-up rollers (1) have an expected life time of approximately
200,000 pages.
7.3.1 To Remove the ASF Pick-up Rollers (1)
$
Remove the ASF cassette (see 7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette).
$
Remove the small access cover (2) by squeezing it as shown.
$
Pull back the retainers (3) as shown and lift the shaft (4) (step 1).
$
Pull the shaft (4) out of the cassette (step 2) and slide the pick-up rollers (1)
off the shaft (4).
7-11
Options
7.3.2 To Install the Pick-up Rollers
$
Slide the new pick-up rollers (1) onto the shaft (4).
$
Insert the free end of the shaft (4) into the mounting (6), ensuring that each
roller flange (5) is positioned so that they join with the indicated slots.
$
Carefully snap the shaft (4) into its mounting (3) and fit the small access
cover (2).
7-12
Options
7.4
Cut Sheet Tray (only for printer PP 803 or PP 806)
Use the cut sheet tray (1) to collect a batch of paper sheets or formsets in the
output area.
7.4.1 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray
$
Remove the manual sheet feeder (6).
$
Remove the upper tractor cassette.
$
Insert the cut sheet tray (1) in position of the upper tractor cassette.
$
Lift the lower part (2) of the cut sheet tray and align it to the length of the
paper in use.
$
To get a correct collection of the sheets or forms loosen screw (3) and
swivel the part (4) down for heavy paper (> 80 g/m²) or up for light
paper (< 80 g/m²).
Note:
$
Make a test print and repeat the procedure if necessary.
Mount the ASF cassettes (see paragraph 7.2.3 Installing the ASF
Cassettes).
7-13
Options
7.5
Manual Sheet Feeder (for printer PP 803)
The optional manual sheet feeder is a special tool to handle cut sheets or
form sets.
Insert the manual sheet feeder (1) into the slots (2)
7.6
Tractor Cassette (for printer PP 803)
The optional tractor cassette open a second paper path for fanfold feeding:
$ If one tractor cassette is empty the printer can change automatically to the
other tractor cassette and continue the print job.
$ It is also possible to handle different forms in one application.
Insert the tractor cassette (3) above the standard tractor cassette in postion (4).
7-14
Options
7.7
Paper Cutter
(only for printer PP 803)
The optional paper Cutter is a tool to cut fanfold paper into single sheets or to
separate a print job.
Note:
If, for some reason, it is not desired to cut exactly on the perforation it is
very important to cut below the perforation.
If the paper is cut above the perforation the remaining paper can easily
bend and cause a paper jam.
Cutting through a sticky label leaves glue on the blade, leading to
problems with the cutting device. Small parts of a label could detach
from its paper and block the cutter or the paper path completely.
7.7.1 Installing the Paper Cutter (3)
$ Insert the Paper Cutter (3) at the left side (6), shift it slightly to the right, and
press the flap (2) at the right side behind the edge (7).
Attention:
Danger to injure one´s hand by the blade !
7-15
8. Technical Data
8.1
PP 803
The following technical data refer to the standard Personality Module
PM SER/PAR.
8.1.1 Printer Specification
Print head technology
Serial Impact Dot Matrix (SIDM) technology.
Print direction
Bidirectional with speed optimization.
Print head
24 needles, needle diameter 0.25 mm (0.01 inch)
600 Mio. strokes per needle.
Print matrix
$ 24 x 36 for letter quality (LQ)
$ 12 x 36 for near letter quality (NLQ)
$ 12 x 12 for draft (DRAFT)
$ 12 x 10 for high speed draft (HSD)
Print Quality
$ Horizontal:
$ Vertical:
$ single pass printing:
$ double pass printing:
360 dpi
180 dpi
360 dpi
8-1
Technical Data PP 803
Print format
$ up to 92 characters at 10 cpi
Ribbon
Black nylon ribbon with auto ribbon run control for 15 million characters.
Dimensions
Width:
Depth:
Height:
550 mm / 21.45 inch
280 mm / 10.92 inch
295 mm / 11.51 inch
Weight
Approximately 16 kg / 39 lb
Diagnostics
Selftest, 'Hex dump', remote diagnostics via interface.
Operator Panel
16 digit LCD for menu controlled setup, status- and error messages, trilingual
(German, English, French).
Keyboard
Membrane tactile type with Ready/Stop LED
Rated Voltage
Printer operates with a single phase switched-mode power supply.
$ Mains selection: automatic range selection
$ Rated voltage: 100 - 125 V VAC / 200 - 240 VAC; 3 A / 1.5 A
$ Rate frequncy:
50 - 60 Hz
Power input
< 200 W operating, 30 W standby
Environmental Temperature
Operating:
+10 °C to + 35 °C (+ 50 °F to + 95 °F)
Storage:
- 40 °C to + 70 °C (- 40 °F to + 158 °F)
8-2
Technical Data PP 803
Relative Humidity
operating:
20% - 80%
storage:
5% - 85%
Noise level acc. to ISO 7779
$ printing:
<56 dB(A)
$ stand-by
no noise
Agency Approvals
Acc. to VDE / GS, UL, C-UL
Eml Approvalss
Acc. to regulation of FTZ/FCC, class B
8.1.2
Performance
Print speed (at 10 cpi)
$ HSD (High Speed Draft)
720 cps (at 12 cpi)
$ DRAFT (Draft Quality)
600 cps
$ NLQ (Near Letter Quality) 300 cps
1
$ LQ 1 (Letter Quality)
150 cps )
1
$ LQ 2 (Letter Quality)
100 cps )
1
) depending on the selected font
Throughput acc. to ECMA-132
Standard Letter (Dr. Grauert) at 10 cpi
$ Draft Quality:
580 pages/h
$ Letter Quality:
260 pages/h
Workload
Pages per month:
30,000
MTBF
10,000 h at 30% duty cycle
8-3
Technical Data PP 803
8.1.3 Paper Handling
Integrated push tractor with park position, zero tear off for continuous paper, full
line position and size control by perforation scanning.
Manual front insertion as an option.
Paper path
Flat bed technology.
$ transportable form thickness max 2.0 mm
Automatic Gap Control (AGC)
The Automatic Gap Control (AGC) optimizes automatically the print gap
according to paper thickness.
Copies
$ 1 original + 8 copies (max. form thickness 0.7 mm [0.028 inch] ).
$ 1 original without any copy at a form thickness of max. 1.0 mm
8.1.3.1
Tractor Feed
Continuous forms (1 original plus 8 copies) suitable for tractor feed:
$
Feeding: 1 removable tractor cassettes + 1 optional tractor cassette
$ Output: rear side
minimum
maximum
$ Paper width:
100 mm (4")
270 mm (10.625")
$ Paper length:
63 mm (2,5")
305 mm (14")
$ Paper weight:
$ 1-ply
60 g/m² (16 lb/ream) 120 g/m² (32 lb/ream)
$ multiply (per sheet) 40 g/m² (12 lb/ream)
$ total set
460 g/m² (122.22 lb/r)
$ total paper / form thickness
0.7 mm (0.028")
$
8-4
Paper movement:
20 inch/sec
Technical Data PP 803
8.1.4
Options
8.1.4.1
Printer Stand
An option to most conveniently install and operate the printer.
$ Width:
450 mm / 17.5 inch
$ Depth:
660 mm / 23.76 inch
$ Height:
840 mm / 32.76 inch
710 mm / 28" (optional with V-Stacker Support)
$ Weight: approx. 17 kg / 37.4 lb
8.1.4.2
V-Stacker Support
Optional to lay down fanfold paper in the best way
8.1.4.3
ManuaI Insertion
Print media suitable for manual insertion with optional Manual Insertion Guide:
minimum
maximum
$ Paper width:
100 mm (4")
210 mm (8.2")
$ Paper length:
63 mm (2.5")
305 mm (14")
$ Paper weight:
$ Cut sheets
70 g/m² (18.7 lb/ream)
150 g/m² (40 lb/ream)
$ Form set of action paper
$ first sheet
70 g/m² (18.7 lb/ream)
$ other sheets
40 g/m² (10.7 lb/ream)
$ last sheet
70 g/m² (18.7 lb/ream)
$ total set
460 g/m² (123 lb/ream)
$
Total paper/form thickness
$ printing
$ transport
0.7 mm (0.028")
2.0 mm (0.08")
8.1.4.4
Tractor Cassette
With the Tractor Cassette a second media of the same or different type can be
preloaded which is fed into the upper paper path.
8-5
Technical Data PP 803
8.1.4.5
Paper Cutter
The optional paper Cutter is a tool to the fanfold paper into single sheets or to
separate a print job.
minimum
maximum
$ Paper length:
3 inch
14 inch
$ Paper weight:
$ Cut sheets
60 g/m² (16 lb/ream)
150 g/m² (40 lb/ream)
$ Form Set (1 + 5 copies)
350 g/m² (95 lb/ream)
Total paper-/form set thickness = 1.1 mm
Life time: 1 milion cuts
Processing Lables
If, for some reason, it is not desired to cut exactly on the perforation it is very
important to cut below the perforation.
If the paper is cut above the perforation the remaining paper can easily bend
and cause a paper jam.
Cutting through a sticky label leaves glue on the blade, leading to problems with
the cutting device.
8.1.4.6
Cut Sheet Tray
Optional to collect single sheets for output at the front (MANUAL)
depth
= 210 mm / 8.3" for short formats (shortest position)
390 mm / 15.4" for long formats
capacity = up to 50 single sheets (80g/m² )
8-6
Technical Data PP 806
8.2
PP 806
The following technical data refer to the standard Personality Module
PM SER/PAR.
8.2.1 Printer Specification
Print head technology
Serial Impact Dot Matrix (SIDM) technology.
Print direction
Bidirectional with speed optimization.
Print head
24 needles, needle diameter 0.25 mm (0.01 inch)
600 Mio. strokes per needle.
Print matrix
$ 24 x 36 for letter quality (LQ)
$ 12 x 36 for near letter quality (NLQ)
$ 12 x 12 for draft (DRAFT)
$ 12 x 10 for high speed draft (HSD)
Print Quality
$ Horizontal:
$ Vertical:
$ single pass printing:
$ double pass printing:
360 dpi
180 dpi
360 dpi
Print format
up to 165 characters at 10 cpi
8-7
Technical Data PP 806
Ribbon
Black nylon ribbon with auto ribbon run control for 30 million characters
Dimensions
Width:
Depth:
Height:
734 mm (28.6 inch)
280 mm (11 inch)
295 mm (11.5 inch)
Weight
Approximately 20 kg (44 lb)
Diagnostics
Selftest, 'Hex dump', remote diagnostics via interface.
Operator Panel
16 digit LCD for menu controlled setup, status- and error messages, trilingual
(German, English, French).
Keyboard
Membrane tactile type with Ready/Stop LED
Rated Voltage
Printer operates with a single phase switched-mode power supply.
$ Mains selection: automatic range selection
$ Rated voltage: 100 - 125 V VAC / 200 - 240 VAC;
3 A / 1.5 A
$ Rate frequncy: 50 - 60 Hz
Power input
< 200 W operating, 30 W standby
Environmental Temperature
Operating:
+10 °C to + 35 °C (+ 50 °F to + 95 °F)
Storage:
- 40 °C to + 70 °C (- 40 °F to + 158 °F)
8-8
Technical Data PP 806
Relative Humidity
operating:
20% - 80%
30% - 70% (when printing on cut sheets with ASF)
storage:
5% - 85%
Noise level acc. to ISO 7779
$ printing:
<53 dB(A)
$ stand-by
no noise
Agency Approvals
Acc. to VDE / GS, UL, C-UL
Eml Approvalss
Acc. to regulation of FTZ/FCC, class B
8.2.2 Performance
Print speed (at 10 cpi)
$ HSD (High Speed Draft)
720 cps (at 12 cpi)
$ DRAFT (Draft Quality)
600 cps
$ NLQ (Near Letter Quality) 300 cps
1
$ LQ 1 (Letter Quality)
150 cps )
1
$ LQ 2 (Letter Quality)
100 cps )
1
) depending on the selected font
Throughput acc. to ECMA-132
Standard Letter (Dr. Grauert) at 10 cpi
$ Draft Quality:
580 pages/h
$ Letter Quality:
260 pages/h
Workload
Pages per month:
40,000
MTBF
10,000 h at 30% duty cycle
8-9
Technical Data PP 806
8.2.3 Paper Handling
$
$
$
Integrated push tractor with park position, zero tear off for continuous paper,
full line position and size control by perforation scanning.
Manual front insertion.
Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) as option.
Paper path
Flat bed technology.
$ transportable form thickness max 2.0 mm
Automatic Gap Control (AGC)
The Automatic Gap Control (AGC) optimizes automatically the print gap
according to paper thickness.
Copies
$ 1 original + 6 copies (max. form thickness 0.7 mm [0.028 inch] ).
$ 1 original without any copy at a form thickness of max. 1.0 mm
8.2.3.1
Tractor Feed
Continuous forms (1 original plus 6 copies) suitable for tractor feed:
$
Feeding: 2 removable tractor cassettes
$ Output: rear side
minimum
maximum
$ Paper width:
100 mm (4")
420 mm (17.7")
$ Paper length:
63 mm (2,5")
305 mm (14")
$ Paper weight:
$ 1-ply
60 g/m² (16 lb/ream) 120 g/m² (32 lb/ream)
$ multiply (per sheet) 40 g/m² (12 lb/ream)
$ total set
350 g/m² (93 lb/ream)
$ total paper / form thickness
0.5 mm (0.02")
$ Paper movement:
21 inch/sec
8-10
Technical Data PP 806
8.2.3.2 ManuaI Insertion
Print media suitable for manual insertion:
minimum
$ Paper width:
100 mm
$ Paper length:
63 mm
$ Paper weight:
$ Cut sheets
70 g/m²
$ Form set of action paper
$ first sheet
70 g/m²
$ other sheets
40 g/m²
$ last sheet
70 g/m²
$ total set
$
Total paper/form thickness
$ printing
$ transport
maximum
420 mm
315 mm
260 g/m²
350 g/m²
0.5 mm (0.02")
2.0 mm
8-11
Technical Data PP 806
8.2.4
Options
8.2.4.1
Printer Stand
An option to most conveniently install and operate the printer.
$ Width:
635 mm
$ Depth:
660 mm
$ Height:
840 mm
$ Weight: approx.
20 kg
8.2.4.2
Automatic Sheet Feeder
Suitable for automatic insertion of cut sheets and thin form sets (Cassette A) or
for thick and inflexible sheets, not interrupted top-glued forms, and envelopes
(Cassette B).
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette A
minimum
maximum
$ Paper width:
105 mm (4.13")
305 mm (12")
$ Paper length:
105 mm (4.13")
315 mm (12.4")
The minimum paper length for all cassettes depends on the mounting position
of the cassette as the feeding path of the paper is the longest in the last
mounted cassette.
Paper Length
Cassette 1 (first mounted)
Cassette 2
Cassette 3 (last mounted)
minimum
104 mm (4.09")
200 mm (7.87")
290 mm (11.42")
Paper weight
$ Cut sheets
70 g/m² (18 lb/ream)
- Form sets of action paper
$ Weight of the first and last sheet
70 g/m² (18 lb/ream)
$ Total thickness of set
Note:
100 g/m² (26 lb/ream)
260 g/m² (69 lb/ream)
80 g/m² (20 lb/ream)
0.35 mm (0.014")
The first and last page of the form set must have a weight between 70
and 80 g/m²; the top-glued area must end 20 mm from the left and right
margins.
Capacity:
8-12
maximum
315 mm (12.4")
315 mm (12.4")
315 mm (12.4")
180 sheets of 80 g/m² (21 lb/ream) paper weight.
Technical Data PP 806
8.2.4.3
Automatic Sheet Feeder with Cassette B
minimum
maximum
Paper width:
105 mm (4.13")
305 mm (12")
The minimum paper length for cassette B depends on the mounting position of
the cassette as the feeding path of the paper is the longest in the last mounted
cassette.
Paper Length
Cassette 1 (first mounted)
Cassette 2
Cassette 3 (last mounted)
Paper weight
$
Cut sheets
minimum
104 mm (4.09")
200 mm (7.87")
290 mm (11.42")
maximum
315 mm (12.4")
315 mm (12.4")
315 mm (12.4")
100g/m² (26 lb/ream)
150g/m² (40 lb/ream)
Appropriate direction of the fibre and flexibility for automatic feeding required.
$ Form sets of action paper
300g/m² (80 lb/ream)
$ Weight of first / last page
70 / 80g/m²
(18/21 lb/ream)
$ Total thickness of set
0.5mm (0.02")
Note:
$
The form sets for cassette B must not have a horizontal perforation or
carbon paper; the top-glued area must not have any margins as required
for cassette A.
Envelopes unlined,
adhesive flap covered
$ Capacity:
70g/m² (18 lb/ream)
90g/m² (24 lb/ream)
40 envelopes
of 70g/m² (18 lb/ream) paper weight
8-13
Technical Data PP 806
8.2.4.4
Cut Sheet Tray
Optional to collect single sheets for output at the front (MANUAL)
depth
= 210 mm / 8.3" for short formats (shortest position)
390 mm / 15.4" for long formats
capacity = up to 50 single sheets (80g/m²).
8.2.4.5
V-Stacker Support
Optional to lay down fanfold paper in the best way.
8-14
Technical Data PP 809
8.3
PP 809
The following technical data refer to the standard Personality Module
PM SER/PAR.
8.3.1 Printer Specification
Print head technology
Serial Impact Dot Matrix (SIDM) technology.
Print direction
Bidirectional with speed optimization.
Print head
24 needles, needle diameter 0.25 mm (0.01 inch)
600 Mio. strokes per needle.
Print matrix
$ 24 x 36 for letter quality (LQ)
$ 12 x 36 for near letter quality (NLQ)
$ 12 x 12 for draft (DRAFT)
$ 12 x 10 for high speed draft (HSD)
Print Quality
$ Horizontal:
$ Vertical:
$ single pass printing:
$ double pass printing:
360 dpi
180 dpi
360 dpi
Print format
up to 165 characters at 10 cpi
8-15
Technical Data PP 809
Ribbon
Black nylon ribbon with auto ribbon run control for 30 million characters
Dimensions
Width:
Depth:
Height:
734 mm (28.6 inch)
280 mm (11 inch)
295 mm (11.5 inch)
Weight
Approximately 20 kg (44 lb)
Diagnostics
Selftest, 'Hex dump', remote diagnostics via interface.
Operator Panel
16 digit LCD for menu controlled setup, status- and error messages, trilingual
(German, English, French).
Keyboard
Membrane tactile type with Ready/Stop LED
Rated Voltage
Printer operates with a single phase switched-mode power supply.
$ Mains selection: automatic range selection
$ Rated voltage: 100 - 125 V VAC / 200 - 240 VAC;
3 A / 1.5 A
$ Rate frequncy: 50 - 60 Hz
Power input
< 200 W operating, 30 W standby
Environmental Temperature
Operating:
+10 °C to + 35 °C (+ 50 °F to + 95 °F)
Storage:
- 40 °C to + 70 °C (- 40 °F to + 158 °F)
Relative Humidity
operating:
storage:
8-16
20% - 80%
5% - 85%
Technical Data PP 809
Noise level acc. to ISO 7779
$ printing:
<53 dB(A)
$ stand-by
no noise
Agency Approvals
Acc. to VDE / GS, UL, C-UL
Eml Approvalss
Acc. to regulation of FTZ/FCC, class B
8.3.2
Performance
Print speed (at 10 cpi)
$ HSD (High Speed Draft)
1.000 cps (at 12 cpi)
$ DRAFT (Draft Quality)
750 cps
$ NLQ (Near Letter Quality)
430 cps
1
$ LQ 1 (Letter Quality)
216 cps )
1
$ LQ 2 (Letter Quality)
150 cps )
1
) depending on the selected font
Throughput acc. to ECMA-132
Standard Letter (Dr. Grauert) at 10 cpi
$ HSD:
800 pages/h
$ Draft Quality:
760 pages/h
$ NLQ:
580 pages/h
$ Letter Quality:
370 pages/h
Workload
Pages per month:
40,000
MTBF
15,000 h at 30% duty cycle
8-17
Technical Data PP 809
8.3.3 Paper Handling
$
Integrated push tractor with park position, zero tear off for continuous paper,
full line position and size control by perforation scanning.
Paper path
Flat bed technology.
$ transportable form thickness max 2.0 mm
Automatic Gap Control (AGC)
The Automatic Gap Control (AGC) optimizes automatically the print gap
according to paper thickness.
Copies
$ 1 original + 3 copies (max. form thickness 0.7 mm [0.028 inch] ).
$ 1 original without any copy at a form thickness of max. 0.7 mm
8.3.3.1
Tractor Feed
Continuous forms (1 original plus 3 copies) suitable for tractor feed:
$
Feeding: 2 removable tractor cassettes
$ Output: rear side
minimum
maximum
$ Paper width:
100 mm (4")
420 mm (17.7")
$ Paper length:
63 mm (2,5")
305 mm (14")
$ Paper weight:
$ 1-ply
60 g/m² (16 lb/ream) 120 g/m² (32 lb/ream)
$ multiply (per sheet) 40 g/m² (12 lb/ream)
$ total set
350 g/m² (93 lb/ream)
$ total paper / form thickness
0.5 mm (0.02")
$
Paper movement:
8-18
20 inch/sec
Technical Data PP 809
8.3.4
Options
8.3.4.1
Printer Stand
An option to most conveniently install and operate the printer..
$ Width:
635 mm
$ Depth:
660 mm
$ Height:
840 mm
$ Weight: approx.
22 kg
8.3.4.2
V-Stacker Support
Optional to lay down fanfold paper in the best way
8-19
Technical Data
8.4
Connectivity
Personality Module (PM) SER/PAR as an sample.
Interface
$ Parallel Centronics® (IEEE 1284 compatibility mode and nibble mode)
$ Serial RS-232/RS-422 shared operation
Emulations
$ EPSON® LQ 1060/2550 / ESC/P2
$ IBM® Proprinter XL24 (AGM)
Buffer
$ Up to 64 kByte.
Character Sets (see also Appendix C "Character Set Tables")
$ Code Pages EE: 437 GK, 851 GK, 928 GK, 855 CYRI, 852, 866, 869,
Kamenicky, ISO Latin 2, Mazovia, 437 HUN, 852 SEE, 866 LAT, WIN LAT 2.
$ Code Pages EE2: 771, 773, 774, 775, Baltic RIM.
$ ISO 8859/15
$ ISO 8859/1
$ IBM SET 1+ 2 incl. 14 national versions.
$ IBM Code Pages 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865.
$ Epson Ext. Graphic Character Set incl. 15 national versions.
Fonts
$ DRAFT:
$ Near letter and letter quality:
$
Letter quality:
Data, HSD; and Data Large.
Roman, San Serif, Courier, Prestige, Script,
Orator-C, and Orator.
OCR B, OCR A.
Character Attributes
Bold, italic, shadow, outline, double strike, underline, double underline,
overline,
strike through, sub/superscript.
Size
double to octuple for all fonts, Data Large 99-fold size.
8-20
Technical Data
Character Pitch
Standard character pitches are: 10, 12, 15, 17.1, 18, 20 cpi and proportional. In
addition, commands are defined to select non-standard character pitches. It is
also possible to print overlapped characters. Fonts will be compressed if
smaller pitches are selected.
Line Spacing
2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 ... 360 lpi
Barcodes
Code 39, 2 of 5 industrial, 2 of 5 interleaved, Codabar (Monarch), EAN 8, EAN
13, Code 93, MSI Mod 10/10, UPC-E, UPC-A, Code 128 (incl. EAN 128),
Postnet and KIX Code (see also Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference).
Graphics
$ Horizontal:
$ Vertical:
$ single pass printing:
$ double pass printing:
360 dpi
180 dpi
360 dpi
Graphics Quality
Selectable are: Standard, Win.LQ 180 dpi, Win.NLQ 90 dpi, or Win.Draft 60 dpi
Note:
Printer drivers for Windows 3.x, 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP, NT 4.0 are
available on the CD-ROM.
8-21
Appendix A
System Interface Description
There are two system interfaces:
$ one serial interface with RS-232C or RS-422 support
$ one Parallel Centronics interface.
The interfaces can be operated in three different modes:
$ parallel interface active
$ parallel interface active in shared mode with serial RS-232C
$ parallel interface active in shared mode with serial RS-422
The following chapter gives an overview about interface characteristics, control
signals, protocols, and cabling.
Any change to the operation mode (PARALLEL, PARALL. / RS232, or
PARALL. / RS422) and to the size of the interface buffer is possible only when
the interface buffer is completely empty of data.
A-1
Appendix A System Interface Description
1. Serial Interface RS-232C / RS-422
1.1
Interface Characteristics
Signal Description RS-232C
Pin No. Direction
PG
Protective Ground
1
-
TXD
Transmit Data (from printer to host)
2
OUTPUT
RXD
Receive Data (from host to printer)
3
INPUT
RTS
Request to Send (printer is requesting data transfer from host)
4
OUTPUT
CTS
Clear to Send (host is ready to receive data from printer)
5
INPUT
DSR
Data Set Ready (host is requesting data transfer from printer,
6
INPUT
can not be used for flow control, internaly set to "1")
SG
Signal Ground
DTR
Data Terminal Ready (printer is ready to receive - see also on the
7
-
20
OUTPUT
following pages the data communication protocols for detail meaning
Signal Description RS-422
Pin No. Direction
PG
Protective Ground
1
-
RDA
Receive Data (from host to printer)
3
INPUT
SDA
Send Data (from printer to host)
9
OUTPUT
SDB
Not Send Data (from printer to host)
10
OUTPUT
RDB
Not Receive Data (from host to printer)
18
INPUT
$ Transmission rate:
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud
$ Parity:
even, odd, or none
$ Word length:
7, or 8 bits
$ Number of stop bits: In receive mode the printer accepts 1, or 2 stop bits.
The printer transmits always two bits.
Transmission Protocols:
$ DTR - Ready/Busy (only RS-232C)
$ XON/XOFF
$ XON/XOFF + DTR (only RS-232C)
A-2
Appendix A System Interface Description
1.2
Transmission Protocols and Connection Diagrams
1.2.1 DTR - Ready/Busy
(Supported RS-232C Protocols) - Full Duplex Local Connection
This protocol uses the following signal lines:
$ Pin
1 Protective Ground (PG)
$
2 Transmit Data (TXD)
$
3 Receive Data (RXD)
$
5 Clear to Send (CTS)
$
7 Signal Ground (SG)
$
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Note:
The signal lines TXD (pin 2) and CTS (pin 5) are only necessary if the
Device Status Report is required.
The READY / BUSY DTR protocol uses the DATA TERMINAL READY
(DTR) line to control the transmission of data from the host to prevent a
buffer overflow.
Note:
Printer DTR may be connected to host DSR + CTS or only to host DSR
and a bridge between RTS and CTS.
A-3
Appendix A System Interface Description
Note:
Printer DTR may be connected to host DSR + CTS or only to host DSR
and a bridge between RTS and CTS.
Additional Information
After Power-ON DTR is activated and the printer is ready to receive data.
DTR is deactivated when the interface buffer has only space left for 256 more
characters. Further incoming data will be stored until the interface buffer is full.
All data sent in addition will get lost. DTR is activated again if there is a free
interface buffer space of 512 characters.
DTR is immediately deactivated, if local mode is entered.
It is activated again, if local mode is left and a minimum of 512 bytes interface
buffer is available.
A-4
Appendix A System Interface Description
1.2.2 XON / XOFF
This protocol requires all signal lines.
$ Pin
1 Protective Ground (PG)
$
2 Transmit Data (TXD)
$
3 Receive Data (RXD)
$
4 Request to Send (RTS)
$
5 Clear to Send (CTS)
$
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
$
7 Signal Ground (SG)
$
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Standard Connection
For local connections RTS with CTS can be connected and likewise DTR
with DSR.
A-5
Appendix A System Interface Description
Additional Information
After Power-ON DTR and RTS are activated and the printer is ready to receive
data.
XOFF is sent, when the interface buffer has only space left for 256 more
characters. XOFF is sent again, at a level of 128 characters buffer space.
Further incoming data will be stored until the interface buffer is full. All data sent
in addition will get lost.
XON is sent when the interface buffer provides space for a minimum of 512
characters.
XON/XOFF can only be sent successfully when CTS is at active state.
When the CTS Mode is set to "CTS ignore" CTS is allways in the active state.
XOFF will be sent immediately if local mode is entered.
XON is sent again, if local mode is left and a minimum of 512 byte interface
buffer is available.
A-6
Appendix A System Interface Description
1.2.3
Serial Interface with RS-422
This interface typ requires the signal lines.
$ Pin
1 Protective Ground (PG)
$
3 Receive Data (RDA)
$
9 Send Data (SDA)
$
10 Not Send Data (SDB)
$
18 Not Receive Data (RDB)
Standard Connection
Note:
Protective ground (PG) connected either to host or printer
A-7
Appendix A System Interface Description
2. Parallel Centronics® Interface
2.1
Interface Characteristics - Connector Pin Assignment / Signal
Definition
Signal Description
_______
STROBE
*)
Data 1 - 8
_____
ACKN
Control Signal from the Host. Printer reads data line
(Data 1 to Data 8) when going low.
Data lines transfer the characters from the host to
the printer. Data 8 = most significant bit.
Pin No. Return line Direction
Pin No.
1
2-9
19
Input
20 - 27
Input
Acknowledge - Negative going pulse from the printer
indicates that the printer has received a character
and is ready for the next data transfer.
10
28
Output
BUSY
Control signal from the printer. A high level indicates
that the printer is unable to receive any more data.**)
11
29
Output
PE
Paper Empty - Control signal from the printer. This
signal goes high when paper runs out, i.e. load
upper or lower tractor, paper jam.
12
--
Output
SELECT
Control signal from the printer. A high level indicates
that the printer is ON-LINE and ready.
13
--
Output
LG
Logic Ground
14
--
--
not used
15
--
LG
Logic Ground
16
--
*)
CG
Chassis Ground
17
--
VCC
+ 5 volt
18
--
SG
Signal Ground
____
INIT
31
--
Input
*)
Control signal from the host. Does not reset the printer.
______
FAULT
Control signal from the printer. A low level indicates
that the printer has been switched off, or the serial
interface is active.
32
--
Output
*)
33
--
LG
Logic Ground
--
not used
_________ Compatible mode (low) 1284 nibble mode (high)
SELECT IN
*)
**)
19 - 20 --
34 - 35 -36
30
Input
Overlined signal names indicate that the signal is true when the signal level is
low.
When the interface buffer is full except for the last character, BUSY will not
be reset. BUSY will be reset when buffer space is available again for least
512 characters in the interface buffer. While the printer is offline (Stop Mode)
BUSY remains active until the printer enters the online state again.
IEEE Std 1284 Nibble mode including Device ID are supported.
The maximum throughput for data transfer is 42,000 characters per second.
A-8
Appendix A System Interface Description
2.2
Transmission Protocol Description
After Power-ON the PE (Paper Empty) signal is set to low level and the
SELECT and FAULT
¯¯¯¯¯¯¯ signals are set to high level.
The printer is now ON-LINE and ready to receive data.
Timing
The host sets a print/control character to the 8 data lines.
After a time delay of a minimum of 0.5 µs, the host sends a STROBE
¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯ pulse of a
minimum of 0.5 µs. When the data byte is accepted into the interface buffer the
ACKN pulse.
printer transmits a BUSY signal and an ¯¯¯¯¯¯
The ACKN
¯¯¯¯¯¯ pulse informs the host that the data has been received and that the
printer is ready to receive new data.
If the interface buffer is full except for the last character the BUSY is not reset in
order to stop the data transfer from the host. The BUSY signal is only reset if
space is available in the interface buffer for a minimum of 512 characters.
While the printer is offline, or a serial interface is active BUSY remains high and
ACKN is sent until the printer enters online state or the serial interface is
no ¯¯¯¯¯
deselected.
A-9
Appendix A System Interface Description
2.3
Timing Diagram
DATA 1 - 8
DATA
0.5 s
STROBE
0.5 s
350 ns max
BUSY
ACKN
A-10
0.5 s
Appendix A System Interface Description
3. Shared Operation
In shared operation the interface buffer capacity is reduced by 256 bytes.
After Power-ON both the serial and the parallel interfaces are available for data
transfer.
If a byte is first recognized by the serial interface the parallel interface is immediately disabled by the BUSY signal. The serial interface is now active and will
operate, using the installed protocols.
If a byte is first recognized by the parallel interface either the DTR signal of the
serial interface is set to OFF or XOFF is sent, depending on the protocol.
If the serial interface starts to receive data while the parallel interface is active, it
is possible to receive 256 bytes of serial data. Any additional serial data will be
lost.
When the interface buffer is completely empty of serial data, and no new data
has been received by the serial interface for more than 10 seconds, both
interfaces are available for data transfer again.
When the interface buffer is completely empty of parallel data and no data has
been received by the parallel interface for more than 60 seconds, the 256 bytes
of serial data will be processed. Afterwards, both interfaces are available for
data transfer again.
A-11
Appendix B
Print Samples of Resident Fonts
The Printer with the Personality Module (PM SER/PAR) provides the following
resident fonts:
B-1
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-2
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-3
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-4
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-5
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
Character Pitches
B-6
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-7
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-8
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-9
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-10
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts
B-11
Appendix C
1.1
Character Set Tables
Code Table ISO 8859-1
2
0
3
4
5
6
7
0
@
P
`
p
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
À
Ð
à
ð
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
2
2
B
R
b
r
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
¤
'
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
¥
)
Å
Õ
å
õ
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
|
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
7
7
G
W
g
w
§
Ç
×
ç
÷
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
a
o
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
Ë
Û
ë
û
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
–
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
F
/
?
O
_
o
*
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
C-1
Appendix C Character Set Tables
1.2
Code Table ISO 8859-15
2
0
3
4
5
6
7
0
@
P
`
p
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
À
Ð
à
ð
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
2
2
B
R
b
r
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
¥
)
Å
å
õ
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
Š
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
7
7
G
W
g
w
§
Ç
×
ç
÷
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
š
å
È
Ø
è
ø
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
a
o
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
Ë
Û
ë
û
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
¬
Œ
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
–
œ
Í
Ý
í
ý
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
®
Ÿ
Î
Þ
î
þ
F
/
?
O
_
o
*
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
C-2
Appendix C Character Set Tables
2
Code Table IBM All Character Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
.
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
±
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
+
3
¯ #
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
Œ
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
1
6
­
°
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
2
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
#
3
-
(
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
,
#
·
5
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
/
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
(
ø
²
E
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
$
!
0
F
"
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
1
SP
A
B
Applicable for Code Table IBM Set 1 and 2
C-3
Appendix C Character Set Tables
3
Code Table IBM Set 1
National Version = USA
0
0
1
NUL
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SP
0
@
P
`
p
NUL
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
á
-
.
1
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
DC1
í
/
±
2
DC2
2
B
R
b
r
DC2
ó
+
+
3
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
DC3
ú
)
Œ
4
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
DC4
ñ
%
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ñ
,
"
1
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
BEL
º
'
.
2
2
(
8
H
X
h
x
BS
¿
#
3
-
,
·
7
BEL
8
BS
9
HT
)
9
I
Y
i
y
HT
A
LF
*
:
J
Z
j
z
LF
¬
B
VT
+
;
K
[
k
{
VT
½
/
C
FF
´
<
L
\
l
|
FF
¼
D
CR
-
=
M
]
m
}
CR
¡
(
ø
²
E
SO
.
>
N
^
n
~
SO
$
!
0
F
SI
/
?
O
_
o
SI
1
SP
C-4
CAN
ESC
CAN
ESC
Appendix C Character Set Tables
3.1 National Version IBM Set 1
Character Code (Hex)
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D
7E
1: USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
2: FRANCE
#
$
à
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
3: GERMANY
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
4: U.K.
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
5: DENMARK
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
~
6: SWEDEN
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
7: ITALY
#
$
@
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
8: SPAIN
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
}
~
9: JAPAN
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
10: NORWAY
#
¤
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
11: DENMARK 2
#
$
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
12: SPAIN 2
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
13: LATIN AM.
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
Ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
14: TURKEY
#
‰
ˆ
Ç
Ö
ù
Ü
{
ç
ö
ú
ü
C-5
Appendix C Character Set Tables
4
Code Table IBM Set 2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
1
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
2
DC2
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
%
(
)
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
#
3 0
0
NUL
6
¯
®
­
°
7
BEL
8
BS
9
HT
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
A
LF
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
B
VT
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
C
FF
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
D
CR
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
E
SO
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
F
SI
/
?
O
_
o
Å
3
4
5
C-6
CAN
ESC
±
6
(
ø
²
$
!
1
#
·
SP
Appendix C Character Set Tables
4.1 National Version IBM Set 2
Character Code (Hex)
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
9B
9D
1: USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
¢
¥
2: FRANCE
#
$
à
(
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
¢
¥
3: GERMANY
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
¢
¥
4: U.K.
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
¢
¥
5: DENMARK
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
ø
Ø
6: SWEDEN
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
¢
¥
7: ITALY
#
$
@
(
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
¢
¥
8: SPAIN
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
}
~
¢
¥
9: JAPAN
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
¢
¥
10: NORWAY
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
ø
Ø
11: DEMARK 2
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
ø
Ø
12: SPAIN 2
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
¢
¥
13: LATIN AM.
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
Ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
¢
¥
14: TURKEY
#
‰
ˆ
Ç
Ö
ù
Ü
{
ç
ö
ú
ü
¢
¥
C-7
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5
Code Table IBM Code Page
Code Page
Countries
1: Code Page 437
USA
2: Code Page 850
Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain,
Japan, Latin Am., Turkey
3: Code Page 858
Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain,
Japan, Latin Am., Turkey
inc. EURO Symbol ( )
4: Code Page 860
Portugal
5: Code Page 863
France
6: Code Page 865
Norway
C-8
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.1 IBM Code Page 437
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
%
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
(
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
)
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
-
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
#
3
0
(
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
#
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
6
·
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
(
ø
²
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
$
!
"
/
?
O
_
o
Å
1
SP
¯
®
­
°
F
±
C-9
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.2 IBM Code Page 850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
C-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
ð
Ó
-
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
Ð
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
Ê
Ô
=
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
Ë
Ò
¾
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
È
õ
¶
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
Á
Y
Õ
§
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
Â
ã
X
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
þ
¸
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
©
Ï
Þ
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
®
Ú
¨
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
Û
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
½
Ù
¹
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
ý
³
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
¢
|
Ý
²
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
×
¥
!
ì
¯
"
/
?
O
_
o
Å
¤
'
SP
¯
®
­
°
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.3 IBM Code Page 858
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
ð
Ó
-
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
Ð
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
Ê
Ô
=
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
Ë
Ò
¾
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
È
õ
¶
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
Á
Õ
§
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
Â
ã
ˆ
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
þ
¸
¯
®
­
°
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
©
Ï
Þ
ß
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
®
Ú
¨
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
Û
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
½
Ù
¹
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
ý
³
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
¢
|
Ý
²
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
×
¥
!
ì
¯
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
¤
'
SP
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
"
C-11
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.4 IBM Code Page 860
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
.
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
À
í
/
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
È
ó
+
+
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
$
4
D
T
d
t
ã
õ
ñ
%
Œ
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
1
&
6
F
V
f
v
Á
Ú
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
2
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
Ì
¿
#
3
(
)
9
I
Y
i
y
Ê
Õ
Ò
,
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
/
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ù
¡
(
ø
²
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ã
$
!
0
/
?
O
_
o
Å
Ó
1
SP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
C-12
¯ ® ¶
­ §
° _
!
"
#
·
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.5 IBM Code Page 863
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
|
-
.
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
È
'
/
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
Ê
ó
+
+
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
Â
Ë
¨
%
Œ
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
Ï
¸
,
"
1
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
¶
û
³
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
¯
'
.
2
2
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
¤
Î
#
3
-
(
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ô
,
#
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
·
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
/
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
-
=
M
]
m
}
=
Ù
¾
(
ø
²
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
À
Û
$
!
0
"
/
?
O
_
o
§
ƒ
1
SP
¯
®
­
°
C-13
Appendix C Character Set Tables
5.6 IBM Code Page 865
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
C-14
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
.
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
+
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
Œ
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
1
_
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
2
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
#
3
-
(
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
,
#
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
·
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
½
/
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
(
ø
²
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
$
!
0
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
¤
1
SP
¯
®
­
°
Appendix C Character Set Tables
6
EPSON Extended Graphics Character Table
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
.
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
±
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
+
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
)
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
Œ
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
,
"
1
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
'
.
2
2
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
#
3
-
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
,
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
·
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
/
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
(
ø
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
$
!
0
F
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
1
SP
5
1
§
C-15
Appendix C Character Set Tables
6.1 National Version EPSON Extended graphics Character Table
Character Code (Hex)
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
1: USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
2: FRANCE
#
$
à
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
3: GERMANY
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
4: U.K.
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
5: DENMARK
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
~
6: SWEDEN
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
7: ITALY
#
$
@
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
8: SPAIN
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
}
~
9: JAPAN
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
10: NORWAY
#
¤
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
11: DENMARK 2
#
$
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
12: SPAIN 2
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
13: LATIN AM.
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
Ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
14: TURKEY
#
Y
X
Ç
Ö
ù
Ü
{
ç
ö
ú
ü
15: LEGAL
#
$
§
'
"
¶
`
©
®
†
™
C-16
Appendix C Character Set Tables
6.2 EPSON Italic Character Table
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
SP
0
@
P
`
1
!
1
A
Q
2
2
B
3
#
3
4
$
5
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
p
SP
0
@
P
`
p
a
q
!
1
A
Q
a
q
R
b
r
2
B
R
b
r
C
S
c
s
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
7
G
W
g
w
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
´
<
L
\
l
|
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
/
?
O
_
o
/
?
O
_
o
This character table is selected by the command ESC t.
C-17
Appendix C Character Set Tables
6.3 National Version EPSON Italic Character Table (part 1)
Character Code (Hex)
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
1: USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
2: FRANCE
#
$
à
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
3: GERMANY
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
4: U.K.
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
5: DENMARK
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
~
6: SWEDEN
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
7: ITALY
#
$
@
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
8: SPAIN
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
}
~
9: JAPAN
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
10: NORWAY
#
¤
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
11: DENMARK 2
#
$
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
12: SPAIN 2
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
13: LATIN AM.
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
Ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
14: TURKEY
#
‰
ˆ
Ç
Ö
ù
Ü
{
ç
ö
ú
ü
15: LEGAL
#
$
§
'
"
¶
`
©
®
†
™
C-18
Appendix C Character Set Tables
6.3 National Version EPSON Italic Character Table (part 2)
Character Code (Hex)
A3
A4
C0
DB
DC
DD
DE
E0
FB
FC
FD
FE
1: USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
2: FRANCE
#
$
à
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
3: GERMANY
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
4: U.K.
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
5: DENMARK
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
~
6: SWEDEN
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
7: ITALY
#
$
@
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
8: SPAIN
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
}
~
9: JAPAN
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
`
{
|
}
~
10: NORWAY
#
¤
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
11: DENMARK 2
#
$
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
12: SPAIN 2
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
13: LATIN AM.
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
Ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
14: TURKEY
#
‰
ˆ
Ç
Ö
ù
Ü
{
ç
ö
ú
ü
15: LEGAL
#
$
§
'
"
¶
`
©
®
†
™
C-19
Appendix C Character Set Tables
7
Code Table OCR-A
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
NUL
DLE
SP
0
@
P
1
SOH
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
STX
DC2
2
B
R
b
r
3
ETX
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
EOT
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
ENQ
NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
ACK
SYN
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
BEL
ETB
7
G
W
g
w
8
BS
CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
HT
EM
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
LF
SUB
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
VT
ESC
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
FF
FS
¬
<
L
\
l
|
D
CR
GR
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
SO
RS
.
>
N
^
n
F
SI
US
/
?
O
C-20
6
7
p
o
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.
Code Pages for the Eastern European Countries (EE)
8.1 CODEPAGE 437 Greek
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
&
-
7
6
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
(
/
w
±
2
2
B
R
b
r
,
+
ˆ
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
.
µ
)
”
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
0
%
A
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
2
!
,
"
¨
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
4
#
0
*
&
±
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
6
%
'
.
2
½
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
'
#
3
G
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
)
Ë
£
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
¥
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
-
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
/
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
Q
(
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
"
3
$
!
"
F
/
?
O
_
o
$
5
1
.
SP
= Space
C-21
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.2 CODEPAGE 851 Greek
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
>
A
,
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
¦
.
±
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
"
±
0
/
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
½
2
Q
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
8
4
3
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
.
6
§
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
Á
û
$
µ
5
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
&
¸
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
6
!
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
#
¨
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
%
7
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
w
½
'
¾
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
)
¿
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
ˆ
+
Ó
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
”
"
!
J
-
F
/
?
O
_
o
?
*
U
SP
= Space
C-22
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.3 CODEPAGE 928 Greek
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
5
%
5
E
U
6
&
6
F
7
7
8
(
9
B
C
D
E
F
°
¦
$
¼
%
±
&
'
Æ
’
²
+
â
ô
£
³
(
)
t
ä
ö
W
,
-
e
u
à
ò
j
.
/
V
f
v
å
û
#%
0
Q
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
§
2
3
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¨
4
5
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
©
6
7
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
>
Ï
A
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
N
G
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¬
"
w
µ
±
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
½
ˆ
½
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
”
!
Ë
F
/
?
O
_
o
Å
¨
#
SP
A
.
6
"
= Space
C-23
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.4 CODEPAGE 855 Cyri
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
O
m
D
%
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
N
l
'
=
2
2
B
R
b
r
I
q
&
<
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
H
p
)
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
w
3
!
(
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
v
2
1
+
7
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
S
e
0
#
*
6
7
7
G
W
g
w
R
d
"
-
A
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
W
y
%
,
@
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
V
x
9
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
]
‹
/
8
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
\
Š
.
5
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
_
C
K
4
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
^
B
J
§
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
¦
!
/
?
O
_
o
;
:
?
>
F
c
b
$
E
¤
P
SP
= Space
C-24
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.5 CODEPAGE 866
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
9
)
9
I
Y
A
*
:
J
B
+
;
C
´
D
& ( * , . 0 2 4 6 -
/
+
)
%
,
"
0
"
&
'
.
2
' ) + R
- S
/ ^
1 _
3 y
5 y
x
#
3
7
°
i
y
8
9
Z
j
z
:
?
K
[
k
{
<
=
<
L
\
l
|
>
;
2
-
=
M
]
m
}
@
!
(
8
¤
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
"
B
#
$
!
C
F
/
?
O
_
o
$
D
%
1
E
SP
F
= Space
C-25
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.6 CODEPAGE 869
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
SP
0
@
P
`
1
!
1
A
Q
2
2
B
3
#
3
4
$
5
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
p
>
A
,
a
q
^
¦
.
±
R
b
r
"
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
7
G
W
g
w
$
&
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
6
0
2
4
6
/
Q
3
%
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
¬
²
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
5
7
³
±
½
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
w
½
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
ˆ
D
U
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
”
F
/
?
O
_
o
¬
SP
= Space
C-26
8
.
8
N
©
£
µ
§
5
j
!
#
%
7
'
)
/X
»
8
©
+
Ë
"
!
-
2
(
W
°
¨
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.7 CODEPAGE 852
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
ð
Ó
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
”
í
Ð
ß
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
–
ó
l
ô
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
Ë
ž
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
b
m
Ÿ
Ù
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
É
–
c
Á
¢
£
§
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
e
—
Ò
Â
^
í
´
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
²
Ó
n
_
î
µ
0
8
(
8
H
X
h
x

³
t
¶
o
¬
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
u
Ú
¨
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Ü
¬
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
¦
§
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
ý
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
Ð
Ñ
f
·
C
º
»
œ
­
Â
8
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
×
!
¼
È
Ý
E
Ô
Õ
Ã
®
¯
½
F
/
?
O
_
o
d
g
¤
2
SP
´
= Space
C-27
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.8 KAMENICKY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
f
É
á
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
2
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
4
$
4
D
T
5
%
5
E
6
&
6
7
8
í
/
±
é
Ó
Ò
ó
+
s
ô
ú
)
-
d
t
ä
ö
£
%
U
e
u
"
)
V
f
v
É
¢
È
,
F
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
G
W
g
w
Ú
ô
'
.
2
-
(
8
H
X
h
x
3
0
°
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
6
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
Í
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
¼
7
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
—
•
´
–
µ
¯
­
¬
#
9
l
º
g
o
n
”
Ý
§
(
8
ø
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
®
$
!
>
F
/
?
O
_
o
Á
t`
1
SP
= Space
C-28
ó
ý
Ö
Ü
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.9 ISO LATIN 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
4
$
4
D
T
5
%
5
E
6
&
6
7
8
B
C
D
E
F
°
¬
Ð
­
ð
c
Á
#
Â
ž
¢
s
b
œ

^
d
t
¤
'
U
e
u
F
V
f
v
–
²
7
G
W
g
w
§
—
³
(
8
H
X
h
x
¨
$
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
´
¶
º
Ð
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
-
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
µ
·
»
Ñ
Ó
Õ
F
SP
/
?
O
_
o
A
Ò
Ô
â
Ÿ
£
Ó
_
ó
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
”
d
¦
§
Ö
—
e
ö
Ç
x
ç
÷
f
g
É
®
È
é
¯
É
t
Ú
u
ú
Ë
Â
ë
Ã
n
Ü
o
ü
Í
Ý
í
ý
Î
¼
î
½
ß
m
l
á
= Space
C-29
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.10 MAZOVIA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
t
Ð
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
u
Ô
/
±
2
2
B
R
b
r
é

ó
+
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
Ó
)
%
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
Ÿ
%
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
d
ž
,
"
)
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
c
û
Ñ
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
Õ-
'
.
2
-
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
²
¿
#
3
0
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
zl
½
6 C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
œ
¼
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
e
Y-
i
(
8
ø
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
³
$
!
>
F
/
?
O
_
o
1
SP
= Space
C-30
b
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.11 CODEPAGE 437 HUN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
/
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
+
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
§
ú
)
%
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
%
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ó
Ñ
,
"
)
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
Ã
ª
0
*
&
µ
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
Ú
¦
'
.
2
-
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
Ü
¿
#
3
0
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
6
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
C
´
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
•
Y-
i
(
8
ø
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
-
$
!
>
F
/
?
O
_
o
Á
1
SP
±
= Space
C-31
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.12 CODEPAGE 852 SEE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
SP
0
Ò
P
Ó
p
Ç
É
á
ð
Ó
-
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
–
í
Ð
ß
2
2
B
R
b
r
é
—
ó
l
Ô
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
Ë
ž
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
b
m
Ÿ
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
É
–
c
Á
¢
£
§
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
e
—
Ò
Â
^
Í
´
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
²
Ó
n
_
Î
µ
0
8
(
8
H
X
h
x

³
t
¶
o
¬
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
u
Ú
¨
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
¦
Ü
¬
­
B
+
;
K
´
k
µ
§
º
Ñ
Â
Ã
C
´
<
L
Ð
l
ð
î
»
f
ý
®
D
-
=
M
d
m
e
Ð
œ
·
Ô
8
¼
Ý
¯
E
.
>
N
f
n
g
Ä
×
Õ
!
È
½
F
/
?
O
_
o
d
g
¤
2
´
SP
= Space
C-32
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.13 CODEPAGE 866 LAT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
0
L
SP
0
@
P
p
P
´
' r
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
C
/
)
2
"
2
B
R
b
r
T
g
+ |
3
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
M
y
f
-
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
N
%
/ ’
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
E
`
"
1
6
°
%
&
6
F
V
f
v
2 0
a
g
3 ˜
7
7
G
W
g
w
7
¥
.
ˆ
5
Ó
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
6
#
‰
7
Ò
9
H
)
9
I
Y
i
y
8
9 ¨
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
:
;
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
=
=
C
0
<
L
\
|
M
b
?
N
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
H
@
!
©
Å
A
µ
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
O
B
#
$
!
Ä
C F
/
?
O
_
o
$ D
%
1
E
SP
"
X
F
s
“
™
= Space
C-33
Appendix C Character Set Tables
8.14 WIN LAT2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
L
SP
0
@
P
`
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
2
B
R
b
r
3
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
°
_
&
6
F
V
f
7
7
G
W
8
(
8
H
9
)
9
A
*
B
C
D
B
C
D
E
F
°
¬
Ð
­
ð
±
Á
#
Â
"
œ
ž
¢

^
C
#
¤
'
Ä
á
&
b
µ
v
-
#
%
g
w
&
X
h
x
I
Y
i
y
O
-
©
:
J
Z
j
z
´
µ
¶
c
·
+
;
K
[
k
{
<
>
«
,
<
L
\
l
|
²
-
=
M
]
m
}
º
³
t
E
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ò
F
"
/
?
O
_
o
Ð
SP
= Space
C-34
8
9
`
,
´
A
â
Ÿ
£
Ó
_
ó
Ô
ä
ô
á
¶
– ¦
d Ö
— §
e ö
§
Ç
x
ç
÷
¨
$
g
é
¯
É
u
ú
»
f ®
É È
t Ú
Ë Â
ë
Ã
¬
œ
n
Ü
o
ü
-
Í
Ý
í
ý
Ó
®
—
Î
¼
î
½
Ñ
Ô
Õ
l
ß
d
Appendix C Character Set Tables
9.
Code Pages for the Eastern European Countries (EE2)
9.1 CP 771
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
P
-
' t
!
1
A
Q
a
q
C
/
)
0
L 1
2
"
2
B
R
b
r
T
+
+ p
3
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
M
y
)
- q
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
N
%
/
Š
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
E
X
,
"
1
‹
6
°
&
6
F
V
f
v
2
0
*
&
3
´
7
7
G
W
g
w
7
'
.
2
5
µ
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
6
#
3
7
Æ
9
r
)
9
I
Y
i
y
8
9
Ç
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
:
;
Ä
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
=
= Å
C
0
<
L
\
|
M
b
b
?
Ò
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
H
@
!
(
c
A
Ó
E
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
O
B #
$
!
f
C
F
"
/
?
O
_
o
1
g
E
$ D
%
u
C-35
Appendix C Character Set Tables
9.2 CP 773
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
j
É
`
°
Ó
t
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
ˆ
/
ß
u
p
0
L 1
2
"
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
Ó
Ö
3
¯ #
3
C
S
c
s
a
©
Ô
.
ž q
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
Õ
¹
õ
Š
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
w
|
Ð
±
+
Õ
‹
6
°
&
6
F
V
f
v
á
¢
0
÷
³
µ
´
7
7
G
W
g
w
e
¸
|
.
Ÿ
µ
8
(
8
H
X
h
x

¹
©
¼
²
’ Æ
9
r
)
9
I
Y
i
y
s
Ö
®
“
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
°
Ü
¬
˜ Ä
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
±
ø
½
™
Å
C
0
<
L
\
|
‰
£
¼
b
¥
Ò
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
Ô
Ø
œ
¶
c
r
Ó
E
!
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
x
§
!
f
¤
F
"
/
?
O
_
o
Á
¤
1
g
C-36
Ç
Appendix C Character Set Tables
9.3 CP 774
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
c
0
L 1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
g
±
2
"
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
K
3
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
G
$
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
Ý
‹
*
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ü
À
µ
)
6
°
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
j
Æ
Ç
µ
0
7
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
t
Ä
Ã
-
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
p
Ó
0
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
#
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
6
·
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
0
<
L
\
|
î
£
¼
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
‡
Š
ø
²
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
/
´
!
2
/
?
O
_
o
Å
Ô
E
r F
"
9
A
B
C
D
C-37
Appendix C Character Set Tables
9.4 CP 775
0
1
0
L
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
0
@
P
`
p
j
É
`
c
Ó
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
ˆ
g
"
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
K
¨
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
a
©
Ô
G
ž ¾
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
Õ
‹
õ
¶
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
u

|
Ñ
À
µ
Õ
§
6
°
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
¢
f
Æ
Ç
µ
÷
7
7
G
W
g
w
e
²
|
t
Ä
Ã
Ÿ
+
8
(
8
H
X
h
x

³
©
p
Ó
’
(
9
r
)
9
I
Y
i
y
s
Ö
®
“
#
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
°
Ü
¬
˜
.
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
±
ø
½
™
,
C
0
<
L
\
|
‰
£
¼
¥
³
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
Ñ
Ø
œ
Š
r
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
x
´
!
¤
F
"
/
?
O
_
o
Å
¤
Ô
´
C-38
2
F
±
Appendix C Character Set Tables
9.5 BATIC RIM
0
1
0
L
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
"
2
B
R
b
r
¯
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
®
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
­
§
%
5
E
U
e
6
°
%
&
6
F
V
7
7
G
8
(
8
9
r
)
A
B
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
b
´
c
µ
±
Š
ž
‹
Ÿ
¢
²
`
¤
a
¥
£
³
d
Ó
e
ó
C
¤
$
Ä
¨
ä
©
u
<
+
Å
Õ
å
õ
f
v
+
%
|
¶
t
Ö
u
ö
W
g
w
,
&
§
r
x
s
÷
H
X
h
x
Ø
ø
f
Æ
g
Ç
9
I
Y
i
y
©
¹
É
œ
é

*
:
J
Z
j
z
°
±
Ð
²
Ñ
³
+
;
K
[
k
{
p
Ä
q
Å
C
0
<
L
\
|
¬
¼
|
Â
}
Ã
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
½
’
Ô
“
Õ
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
¾
ˆ
Ò
‰
Ó
F
/
?
O
_
o
Æ æ
˜
™
,
O
<
-
>
®
C-39
Appendix D
IBM ProPrinter Quick Reference
This appendix contains basic information on the IBM ProPrinter XL 24
Emulation commands supported in the Printer:
Characters used in control functions appear in monospaced type. Table 1
explains some of the conventions used.
A pair of numbers separated by a slash ( / ) character indicates Column/Row
notation. This notation refers to the location of a character in a standard code
table, such as ASCII. (example: 1/B = 1B is the hex-code for Escape)
Spaces appear between characters in sequence for clarity; they are not part of
the format.
At the end of this chapter you will find a listing of the IBM ProPrinter Emulation
commands classified by Hex Code and a Hex - Decimal conversion table.
The following conventions are used in the command listings:
Table 1 Conventions
ESC
Escape (1/B), introduces an escape sequence
Pn
Numeric parameter, or number of units that specify a distance or
quantity pertaining to the escape sequence, control function or control
string. Accepted values are 0...9999, may be preceded by + or -.
If the parameter is in normal notation like "200" the programming in hexcode is according to a ASCII table. ("200" = 32,30,30 in hex).
If the parameter must be programmed in hex-code the notation is with a
slash. (1/A = 1A in hex-code)
v1...vn A series of parameters pertaining to the escape sequence, control
function or control string.
SP
Is standing for Space (hex 20)
D-1
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 2: Control Codes
Column/Row
Mnemonic
Function
0/0
0/8
0/9
0/A
0/B
0/C
0/D
0/E
0/F
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/4
1/8
1/B
2/0
7/F
1/B 5/1 2/3
1/B 5/1 2/4
NUL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
CAN
ESC
SP
DEL
ESC Q #
ESC Q $
Null
Backspace
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Vertical Tab
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Double Width Printing By Line
Condensed Printing (17.1 cpi)
Select Printer
Select Pica (10 cpi)
Buffer Data Flow Control
Cancel Double Width Printing By Line
Cancel Buffer
Initiate Escape Sequence
Space
Delete
Deselect Printer
Deselect Printer
D-2
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 3: Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC 0
Set Line Space to 1/8"
ESC 1
Set Line Space to 7/72"
ESC 2
Start Variable Line Space
ESC 4
Set Top of Form
ESC 5 P1
Carriage Return Function
P1 = 1 or 0/1: select CR + LF
P1 = 0 or 0/0: cancel CR
ESC A P1
Set Line Space to P1/72" (P1/60")
P1 = P1/72" lpi (non AGM)
P1 = P1/60" lpi (AGM)
(P1 = 0/1...5/5)
12
Note: Default = /72" or 6 lpi
ESC B P1 P2 . . . P64 NUL
Set Vertical Tabs
ESC C P1
Set Form Length in Lines(P1 = 0/1...7/F)
ESC C NUL P1
Set Form Length in Inch (P1 = 0/1...1/6)
ESC N P1
Set Automatic Perforation Skip
P1: is the number of lines from bottom
of paper to skip. (P1 = 0/0...F/F)
ESC O
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip
ESC [ \ EOT NUL NUL NUL P1 NUL
Set Line Space Unit
EOT = 0/4
P1 = B/4 : select 1/180"
P1 = D/8 : select 1/216"
P1 = 0/0 : setting remains unchanged
(Pn = 0/1...F/F)
D-3
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 3 (Cont.): Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC ]
Reverse Line Feed
ESC [ > P1 ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 s SPSIF
Native Command
Select Paper Source and Insert
Form (>), Print Gap, Paper Exit, Cut Mode
Note:
Any parameter is optional and may be skipt .
ESC [ P1 s
Native Command
ESC [ ; P2 s
Native Command
D-4
SPS
Paper Source:
2
P1 = 0 : Manual Feed )
1
P1 = 1 : ASF, Bin 1 )
1
P1 = 2 : ASF, Bin 2 )
1
P1 = 3 : ASF, Bin 3 )
P1 = 6 : upper Tractor
P1 = 7 : Tractor Feed (lower Tractor)
1
P1 = 8 : AFS, Bins 1 or 2 )
1
P1 = 9 : ASF, Bins 2 or 3 )
1
P1 = 10
: ASF, Bins 1 or 2 or 3 )
P1 = 15
: upper and lower Tractor
1
2
) only for printer PP 806; ) not for PP 809
AGC/PCC
Procedure:
P2 = 0 : Automatic Gap Control
P2 = 1 : Print Gap for 1-ply copy
P2 = 2 : Print Gap for 2-ply copies
P2 = 3 : Print Gap for 3-ply copies
3
P2 = 4 : Print Gap for 4-ply copies )
P2 = 5 : Print Gap for 5-ply copies
P2 = 6 : Print Gap for 6-ply copies
P2 = 7 : Print Gap for 7-ply copies
4
P2 = 8 : Print Gap for 8-ply copies )
4
P2 = 9 : Print Gap for 9-ply copies )
2
4
) PP 809 max 4 copies; ) only for printer PP 803
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 3 (Cont.): Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
ESC [ ; ; P3 s
Native Command
ESC [ ; ; ; P4 s
Native Command
Mnemonic
Function
Paper Exit:
P3 = 0 :
reserved
P3 = 1 or 2 : Paper Exit Front (manual)
P3 = 3 :
Batch output (rear), default
3
Cut Mode On/Off: )
P4 = 0 :
Cut Mode Off
P4 = 1 :
Cut Mode On
P4 = 2 :
Cut on actual position
(cutting edge is approximate 4 mm above the base of the actual line)
3
) only active if CUT DEVICE = YES
D-5
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 4: Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC :
Select Elite (12 cpi)
ESC - P1
Cancel / Select Underline
P1 = 0/0 cancel Underline Printing
P1 = 0/1 set Underline Printing
ESC _ P1
Cancel / Select Overline Printing
P1 = 0/0 cancel Overline Printing
P1 = 0/1 set Overline Printing
ESC [ @ EOT NUL NUL NUL P1 P2
Example:
D-6
Double, Multiple -Width/ - Height Mode
P1 controls line spacing (e.g. 0/x) and
character height (e.g. x/0)
P2 controls character width
P1 = 0/x line spacing unchanged
P1 = 1/x single line space
P1 = 2/x double line space
P1 = 3/x triple line space
P1 = 4/x quadruple line space
P1 = x/0 charcter height unchanged
P1 = x/1 single charcter height
P1 = x/2 double character height
P1 = x/3 triple character height
P1 = x/4 quadruple character height
P2 = 0/0 character width unchanged
P2 = 0/1 single character width
P2 = 0/2 double character width
P2 = 0/3 triple character width
P2 = 0/4 quadruple character width
Coding to select "double line space", "double character
height", and "double character width" in Hex:
1B 5B 40 04 00 00 00 22 02
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC D P1 P2 ... P32 NUL
Set Horizontal Tabs (P1...P32 = 0/1...F/F)
ESC E
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)
ESC F
Cancel Emphasized Printing (bold)
ESC G
Select Double Strike Printing (bold)
ESC H
Cancel Double Strike Printing
ESC I P1
Select Character Mode
P1 = 0/0 : Draft, 10 cpi
P1 = 0/1 : Draft, Proportional
P1 = 0/2 : Courier, 10 cpi
P1 = 0/3 : Courier, Proportional
P1 = 0/8 : Draft, 12 cpi
P1 = 0/A : Courier, 12 cpi
P1 = 1/0 : Draft, 17 cpi
P1 = 1/2 : Courier, 17 cpi
ESC P P1
Cancel / Select Proportional Printing
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Proportional
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Proportional
ESC R
Restore Horizontal Tabs to Default
ESC S P1
Select Superscript/Subscript
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : select Superscript
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Subscript
D-7
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic Function
ESC T
Cancel Superscript/Subscript
ESC U P1
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Unidirectional
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Unidirectional
ESC W P1
Cancel / Select Double Width
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Double Width
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Double Width
ESC X P1 P2
Set Left and Right Margins
P1 : Left Margin
P2 : Right Margin
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC d P1 P2
Set Relative Horizontal Dot Position
(P1 + P2 x 256)/120"
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC <
Home Position of Printhead (left margin)
ESC ;
Set Left Margin at Current Position
ESC [ P1 SP r
Native Command
SPQ
Note:
D-8
Select Print Quality LQ / NLQ
P1 = 0 :
LQ
P1 = 1 :
NLQ; this is only valid if the
NLQ type style is available.
P1 = 2 :
Draft
P1 = 3 :
HSD (High Speed Draft)
The LQ / NLQ selection becomes active
if a LQ-/NLQ-font is selected.
Draft / HSD becomes active if type style
DATA is selected.
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 ; P2 x
Native Command
CPL
Select Font and Character Pitch
(parameter P1 or P2 may be skipped,
see following alternative command
sequences)
ESC [ P1 x
possible format of
Native Command CPL
P1 selects the font
P1 = 0 or missing : Font is unchanged
P1 = 1
: Data
P1 = 2
: Roman
P1 = 3
: Sans Serif
P1 = 4
: Courier
P1 = 5
: Prestige
P1 = 6
: Script
P1 = 7
: OCR-B
P1 = 8
: OCR-A
P1 = 9
: Orator-C
P1 = 10
: Script
P1 = 11
: Data Large
ESC [ ; P2 x
possible format of
Native Command CPL
P2 selects the character pitch
P2 = 0 or missing : Pitch is unchanged
P2 = 1
: 10 cpi
P2 = 2
: 12 cpi
P2 = 3
: 15 cpi
P2 = 4
: (proportional)
P2 = 5
: proportional
P2 = 6
: 14.4 cpi
P2 = 7
: 18 cpi
P2 = 8
: 17.1 cpi
P2 = 9
: 20 cpi
D-9
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 5: Character Set Selection
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic Function
ESC 6
Select Character Set 2
ESC 7
Select Character Set 1
ESC \ P1 P2
Print from All Character Set
Number of codes = (P1 + P2 * 256)
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC ^ P1
Print Single Character from All
Character Set
P1 = Number of Char. Set or Code Page
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC [ T n1 n2 NUL NUL P1 P2
Code Page Switching
n1 = 4, n2 = 0
P1 P2 for Code-Page number, most
significant byte first.
P1 P2
D-10
1
3
181
82
: CP 437 U.S.A.
: CP 850 Multilingual
3
3
90
92
: CP 858 Multilingual + Euro
: CP 860 Portugal
3
3
95
97
: CP 863 Canada - French
: CP 865 Norway
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 6: Graphics Modes
Escape Sequence
ESC 3 P1
ESC J P1
Mnemonic Function
Set Line Space to P1/216" (P1/180")
P1
/216 lpi (non AGM),
P1
/180 lpi (AGM)
(P1 = 0/1...F/F)
Perform P1/216" (P1/180") Line Feed
/216 lpi (non AGM),
P1
/180 lpi (AGM)
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)
P1
ESC K P1 P2 v1 . . . vn
Standard Density Graphics Mode *)
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC L P1 P2 v1 . . . vn
Double Density Graphics Mode *)
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC Y P1 P2 v1 . . . vn
Double Speed & Density Graphics Mode *)
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
ESC Z P1 P2 v1 . . . vn
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode *)
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.
D-11
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 6 (Cont.): Graphics Modes
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic Function
ESC [ g P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Select Various Graphics Modes (IBM)
P1 + P2 * 256 = number of data
bytes + 1
(P1,P2 = 0/0...F/F)
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code
Parameter Table Graphic Density:
P3
0/0
0/1
0/2
0/3
0/8
0/9
0/B
0/C
Graphic type
Standard Density (K)
Double Density (L)
2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y)
Quadruple Density (Z)
Standard Density
Double Density
Triple Density
Hex Density
dots
max.
hor.
vert.
vert.
per
of
density
density
density
column
columns
( dpi )
no AGM AGM
8
8
8
8
24
24
24
24
816
1632
1632
3264
816
1632
2448
4896
60
120
120
240
60
120
180
360
72
72
72
72
180
180
180
180
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.
Example:
D-12
box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density,
8 dots / column
hex: 1B 5B 67 09 00 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF
60
60
60
60
180
180
180
180
*)
*)
*)
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7: Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic Function
ESC [
$$
Control String Introducer (CSI) for 'ESC ['
ESC
$$/
Control String Introducer (CSI) for 'ESC'
ESC * P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Select Various Graphics Modes
P2 + P3 * 256 = number of columns
(P2,P3 = 0/0...F/F)
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code
Parameter Table Graphic Density:
P1
Graphic type
dots
max.
hor.
vert.
vert.
per
of
density
density
density
column
columns
( dpi )
no AGM AGM
60
120
120
240
80
72
90
144
60
120
90
180
360
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
180
180
180
180
180
0/0 Standard Density (K)
8
816
0/1 Double Density (L)
8
1632
0/2 2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y) 8
1632
0/3 Quadruple Density (Z)
8
3264
0/4 CRT I
8
1088
0/5 Plotter
8
979
0/6 CRT II
8
1224
0/B Double Density Plotter 8
1958
2/0 Standard Density
24
816
2/1 Double Density
24
1632
2/6 CRT III
24
1224
2/7 Triple Density
24
2448
2/8 Hex Density
24
4896
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.
Example:
60
60
60
60
60
*)
*)
60
*)
180
180
180
180
180
*)
box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density,
8 dots / column
hex: 1B 2A 00 08 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF
D-13
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 ; P2 w
SNVCT
Set National Version and Code Table
P1 = 1 - 15 national version
depending on selected character set (see
Appendix C Char. Set Tables)
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table (see
command SCT)
P1 for national version IBM SET 2:
P1 = 1
P1 = 2
P1 = 3
P1 = 4
P1 = 5
P1 = 6
P1 = 7
P1 = 8
P1 = 9
P1 = 1 0
P1 = 1 1
P1 = 1 2
P1 = 1 3
P1 = 1 4
: U.S.A
: France
: Germany
: U.K.
: Denmark
: Sweden
: Italy
: Spain
: Japan
: Norway
: Denmark 2
: Spain 2
: Latin AM
: Turkey
P1 for IBM CODE PAGE:
P1 for CODE PAGE EE:
P1 = 1 : CP 437
P1 = 2 : CP 850
P1 = 3 : CP 860
P1 = 4 : CP 863
P1 = 5 : CP 865
P1 = 6 : CP 858
P1 = 1
P1 = 2
P1 = 3
P1 = 4
P1 = 5
P1 = 6
P1 = 7
P1 = 8
P1 = 9
P1 = 1 0
P1 = 1 1
P1 = 1 2
P1 = 1 3
P1 = 1 4
P1 for CODE PAGE EE2:
P1 = 1 : CP 771
P1 = 2 : CP 773
P1 = 3 : CP 774
P1 = 4 : CP 775
P1 = 5 : CP BALTIC RIM
ESC [ ; P2 w
SCT
: CP 437 GK
: CP 851 GK
: CP 928 GK
: CP 855 CYRI
: CP 866
: CP 869
: CP 852
: KAMENICKY
: ISO LATIN 2
: MAZOVIA
: CP 437 HUN
: CP 852 SEE
: CP 866 LAT
: WIN LAT2
Set Code Table
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/1; LATIN 1
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/15; LATIN 9
P2 = 0 6 1 : IBM Set 1
P2 = 0 6 2 : IBM Set 2
1)
P2 = 0 6 3 : IBM Code Page
P2 = 0 7 1 : EPSON Ext. G. C. T
P2 = 1 0 0 : CODE PAGES EE
P2 = 1 0 1 : CODE PAGES EE2
1) depending on selected character set (P1) the IBM CODE PAGE 437, 850, 860,
863, 865, or 858 (P1 = 6; P2 = 63) will be activated!
D-14
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP r
SM #
ESC M
RLF
Select Macro and Change Emulation
P1 = 1: Macro 1
P1 = 2: Macro 2
P1 = 3: Macro 3
P1 = 4: Macro 4
P2 = 0: no change of emulation
P2 = 2: IBM ProPrinter Emulation
P2 = 3: IBM ProPrinter AGM Emulation
P2 = 4: EPSON Emulation
Reverse Line Feed
ESC [ < s
EJF
Eject Form
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP B
GSM
Graphic Size Modification
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width
P1 = 2 0 0 / P2 = 2 0 0 : double height / width
P1 = 3 0 0 / P2 = 3 0 0 : triple height / width
P1 = 4 0 0 / P2 = 4 0 0 : quadruple height / width
P1 and P2 max. = 8 0 0 in steps of 100
Graphic Size Modification for DATA LARGE
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width
P1 and P2 max. 9 9 0 0 in steps of 100
ESC [ P1 `
HPA
Set Horizontal Position Absolute
P1 = print column
(P1 = 0...9999)
ESC [ P1 a
HPR
Set Horizontal Position Relative
P1 = print column
(P1 = 0...9999)
ESC [ P1 b
RPT
Repeat Character
P1 = number of repetitions (P1 = 1...999)
D-15
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 d
VPA
Set Vertical Position Absolute
P1 = 0 or 1: Top of Form / Top Margin
P1 = 2... 9999: Vertical Line
ESC [ P1 e
VPR
Set Vertical Position Relative
P1 = 0 or 1: moves the position one line
P1 = 2... 9999: Vertical Line
ESC [ P1 g
TBC
Tabulation Clear
P1 = 0:
at active print pos. all tabs
and margin marker,
P1 = 3:
all horizontal-,
P1 = 4:
all vertical tabs and margin
marker
ESC [ P1 w
SNV
Set National Version
P1 = 1 - 15 national version
depending on selected character set
(see SNVCT and Appendix C Character
Set Tables)
ESC [ P1 {
LSL
Line Space Load
P1 =
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 48,
60, 72, 90, 144, 180, 360
D-16
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 m
SGR
Set Graphic Rendition
P1 = 0: default - no rendition or
rendition reset
P1 = 1: bold
P1 = 3: italics
P1 = 4: underline
P1 = 9: crossed out or strike through
printing
P1 = 20: enlarged double width printing
P1 = 21: double underline
P1 = 22: bold reset
P1 = 23: italics reset
P1 = 24: underline reset
P1 = 29: crossed out reset
P1 = 30 to 36: ignored
P1 = 53: over lined
P1 = 55: over lined reset
D-17
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 SP z
see Appendix F
BH
Barcode Header
BARCODE Programming
P2: Barcode typ
P3: Height of barcode
P4: Width of the thin bars
P5: Width of the thin gaps
P6: Ratio width to thin (bars / gaps)
P7: Uni-directional or bi-directional
printing
0 : or not programmed: means no
changes
1 : uni-directional printing in LQ
2 : bi-directional printing in LQ
3 : uni-directional printing in NLQ
4 : bi-directional printing in NLQ
ESC [ ? 0 h
SMBC
Set Mode Barcode
ESC [ ? 0 l
RSBC
Reset Mode Barcode
D-18
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Hex Code
Format
Page
00
Null
D-2
08
Backspace
D-2
09
Horizontal Tab
D-2
0A
Line Feed
D-2
0B
Vertical Tab
D-2
0C
Form Feed
D-2
0D
Carriage Return
D-2
0E
Select Double Width (one line)
D-2
0F
Select Condensed Mode (17,1 cpi)
D-2
11
Select Printer
D-2
12
Select Pica (10 cpi)
D-2
13
Buffer Data Flow Control
D-2
14
Cancel Double Width
D-2
18
Cancel Buffer
D-2
1B
Escape
D-2
20
Space
D-2
7F
Delete
D-2
1
1B 30
Set Line Space to /8"
D-3
1B 31
Set Line Space to 7/72"
D-3
1B 32
Start Variable Line Space
D-3
1B 34
Set Top Of Form
D-3
1B 36
Select Character Set 2
D-9
1B 37
Select CHaracter Set 1
D-9
1B 3A
Select Elite (12 cpi)
D-5
1B 3B
Set Left Margin at Current
D-7
1B 3C
Home Position of Printhead
D-7
1B 45
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)
D-6
1B 46
Cancel Emphasized Printing
D-6
1B 47
Select Double Strike (bold)
D-6
1B 48
Cancel Double Strike
D-6
1B 4D
Reverse Line Feed
D-14
1B 4F
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip
D-3
1B 52
Restore Horizontal Tabs to Default
D-6
D-19
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Hex Code
Format
Page
1B 54
Cancel Superscript/Subscript
D-7
1B 5D
Reverse Line Feed
D-4
24 24
Control String Introducer for ESC [
D-12
24 24 2F
Control String Introducer for ESC
D-12
Cancel / Select / Underline
D-5
Set Line Space to P1/216" (P1/180")
D-10
1B 2D 00
/
1B 2D 01
1B 33 P1
1B 35 01
Carriage Return Function
D-3
1B 41 P1
/
1B 35 00
Set Line Space to P1/72" (P1/60")
D-3
1B 43 P1
Set Form Length in Lines
D-3
1B 49 P1
Select Character Mode
D-6
1B 4A P1
Perform P1/216" (P1/180") Line feed
D-10
1B 4E P1
Set Automatic Perforation Skip
D-3
1B 50 00
/
1B 51 23
or
1B 50 01
1B 51 24
Cancel / Select Proportional Printing
D-6
Deselect Printer
D-2
D-6
1B 53 00
/
1B 53 01
Select Superscript / Subscipt
1B 55 00
/
1B 55 01
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing D-7
1B 57 00
/
1B 57 01
Cancel / Select Double Width
D-7
Single Character from All Char. Set
D-9
Cancel / Select Overline Printing
D-5
1B 2A P1 P2 P3 data
Select Various Graphics Modes
D-12
1B 42 P1....P64 00
Set Vertical Tabs
D-3
1B 5E P1
1B 5F 00
/
1B 5F 01
1B 43 00 P1
Set Form Lenght in Inches
D-3
1B 44 P1...Pn 00
Set Horizontal Tabs
D-6
1B 4B P1 P2 data
Standard Density Graphics Mode
D-10
1B 4C P1 P2 data
Double Density Graphics Mode
D-10
1B 58 P1 P2
Set Left and Right Margins
D-7
1B 59 P1 P2 data
Double Speed & Double Density
Graphics Mode
D-10
1B 5A P1 P2 data
Quadruple density Graphics Mode
D-10
1B 5B 3B P2 73
AGC / PCC Procedure
D-4
1B 5B 3B P2 77
Set Code Table
D-13
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 3B P5 3B
P6 3B P7 20 7A
Barcode Header
D-17
D-20
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Hex Code
Format
Page
1B 5B 3C 73
Eject Form
D-14
1B 5B 3E 73
Insert Form
D-4
1B 5B 3E P1 3B P2 3B P3 73
Select Paper Source and Insert Form D-4
1B 5B 3F 30 68
Set Mode Barcode
D-17
1B 5B 3F 30 6C
Reset Mode Barcode
D-17
1B 5B 40 04 00 00 00 P1 P2
Double, Multible -Width/-Height Mode D-5
1B 5B 54 n1 n2 NUL NUL P1 P2
Code Page Switching
D-9
1B 5B 5C 04 00 00 00 P1 00
Set Line Space Unit
D-3
1B 5B 67 P1 P2 P3 data
Select Various Graphics Modes (IBM) D-11
1B 5B P1 20 58
Select Print Quality LQ / NLQ
D-7
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 72
Select Macro and Change Emulation
D-14
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 42
Graphic Size Modification
D-14
1B 5B P1 3B P2 77
Set National Version and Code Table
D-13
1B 5B P1 3B P2 78
Select Font and Character Pitch
D-8
1B 5B P1 60
Set Horizontal Position Absolute
D-14
1B 5B P1 61
Set Horizontal Position Relative
D-14
1B 5B P1 62
Repeat Character
D-14
1B 5B P1 64
Set Vertical Position Absolute
D-15
1B 5B P1 65
Set Vertical Position Relative
D-15
1B 5B P1 67
Tabulation Clear
D-15
1B 5B P1 6D
Set Graphic Rendition
D-16
1B 5B P1 73
Select Paper Source
D-4
1B 5B P1 77
Set National Version
D-15
1B 5B P1 7B
Line Space Load
D-15
1B 5C P1 P2
Print from All Character Set
D-9
1B 64 P1 P2
Set Relative Horizontal Dot Position
D-7
D-21
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce
Hex - Decimal Conversion Table
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
1
1
17
33
49
65
81
97
113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241
2
2
18
34
50
66
82
98
114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242
3
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243
4
4
20
36
52
68
84
100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244
5
5
21
37
53
69
85
101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245
6
6
22
38
54
70
86
102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246
7
7
23
39
55
71
87
103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247
8
8
24
40
56
72
88
104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248
9
9
25
41
57
73
89
105 121 137 153 269 185 201 217 233 249
A
10
26
42
58
74
90
106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250
B
11
27
43
59
75
91
107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251
C
12
28
44
60
76
92
108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252
D
13
29
45
61
77
93
109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253
E
14
30
46
62
78
94
110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254
F
15
31
47
63
79
95
111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255
D-22
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Appendix E
EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick
Reference
This appendix contains basic information on the EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and
EPSON Barcodes Printer Emulation:
Characters used in control functions appear in monospaced type. Table 1
explains some of the conventions used.
A pair of numbers separated by a slash ( / ) character indicates Column/Row
notation. This notation refers to the location of a character in a standard code
table, such as ASCII. (example: 1/B = 1B is the hex-code for Escape)
Spaces appear between characters in sequence for clarity; they are not part of
the format.
At the end of this chapter you will find a listing of the EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2,
and EPSON Barcodes Emulation commands classified by Hex Code and a HexDecimal conversion table.
The following conventions are used in the command listings:
Table 1 Conventions
ESC
Escape (1/B), introduces an escape sequence
P1
Numeric parameter, or number of units that specify a distance or
quantity pertaining to the escape sequence, control function or control
string. Accepted values are 0...9999, may be preceded by + or -.
If the parameter is in normal notation like "200" the programming in hexcode is according to a ASCII table. ("200" = 32,30,30 in hex).
If the parameter must be programmed in hex-code the notation is with a
slash. (1/A = 1A in hex-code)
v1...vn A series of parameters pertaining to the escape sequence, control
function or control string.
SP
Is standing for Space (hex 20)
E-1
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 2: Control Codes
Column/Row
Mnemonic
Function
0/0
0/8
0/9
0/A
0/B
0/C
0/D
0/E
0/F
1/1
1/2
NUL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DC1
DC2
1/3
1/4
1/8
1/B
2/0
7/F
DC3
DC4
CAN
ESC
SP
DEL
Null
Backspace
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Vertical Tab
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Double Width Printing By Line
Condensed Printing
Select Printer
Cancel condensed set by SI or ESC SI
command
Deselct Printer
Cancel Double Width Printing By Line
Cancel Buffer
Initiate Escape Sequence
Space
Delete
Table 3: Terminal Management
Escape Sequence
ESC @
ESC =
ESC >
ESC #
E-2
Mnemonic
Function
Initialize Printer
Set Most Significant Bit to 0
Set Most Significant Bit to 1
Cancel Most Significant Bit Control
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Vertical Form Handling
The printer is always equipped with two continuous form tractors. The last sheet
of a continuous form stack can be printed on up to the end of the form.
The capabillity of the printer to feed paper from different sources is optimally
supplemented by the option that automatically adjust the distance between the
print head and the print bar.
Table 4: Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC 0
Set Line Space to 1/8"
ESC 2
Set Line Space to 1/6"
ESC 3 P1
Set Line Space to P1/180"
(P1 =0/ 0...F/F)
ESC + P1
Set Line Space to P1/360"
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)
ESC A P1
Set Line Space to P1/60"
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)
ESC B NUL
Clear Vertical Tabs
ESC B P1 P2 . . . P16 NUL
Set Vertical Tabs
ESC C P1
Set Form Length in Lines
(P1 = 0/1...7/F)
ESC C NUL P1
Set Form Length in Inches
(P1 = 0/1...1/6)
ESC J P1
Perform P1/180" Line Feed
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)
ESC N P1
Set Automatic Perforation Skip
P1 is the number of lines from bottom of
paper to skip.
(P1 = 0/1...7/F)
ESC O
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip
ESC b P1 P2 .. P16 NUL
Set Vertical Tabs in Channel P1
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 - 7
P2..P16 = line number (P2..P16 = 0/1..F/F)
(P1...P16 = 0/1...F/F)
E-3
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 4: (Cont.) Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC b P1 NUL
Clear all Tabs in Channel P1
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 - 7
ESC j P1
Perform P1/180" Reverse Line Feed
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)
ESC / P1
Select Vertical Tab Channel
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 .. 7
ESC EM P1
Form Feed and ASF Control
Form Feed: EM = 1/9
ASF Control:
P1 = 3/1:
ASF Bin 1 or Bin 2
P1 = 3/2:
ASF Bin 2 or Bin 3
P1 = 3/3:
ASF Bin1 or Bin 2 or Bin 3
P1 = R: (5/2) eject sheet
ESC [ > P1 ; P2 ; P3, P4 s SPSIF Select Paper Source and Insert Form,
Native Command
Print Gap, Paper Exit (any parameter > or
P1 to P4 may be skipped, see following
alternative command sequences);
> = Insert Form
Note:
Any parameter is optional and may be skipt .
ESC [ P1 s
Native Command
E-4
SPS
Paper Source:
2
P1 = 3/0
: Manual Feed )
1
P1 = 3/1
: ASF, select Bin 1 )
1
P1 = 3/2
: ASF, select Bin 2 )
1
P1 = 3/3
: ASF, select Bin 3 )
P1 = 3/6
: select upper Tractor
P1 = 3/7
: select lower Tractor
1
P1 = 3/8
: ASF, Bin 1 or Bin 2 )
1
P1 = 3/9
: ASF, Bin 2 or Bin 3 )
1
P1 = 3/1 3/0 : ASF, Bin1, or 2, or 3 )
P1 = 3/1 3/5 : upper and lower Tractor
1
2
) only for printer PP 806; ) not for PP 809
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 4: (Cont.) Vertical Form Handling
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
ESC [ ; P2 s
Native Command,
AGC/PCC
ESC [ ; ; P3 s
Native Command
ESC [ ; ; ; P4 s
Native Command
Function
Print Gap Control:
P2 = 3/0 : Automatic Gap Control
P2 = 3/1 : Print Gap for 1-ply copy
P2 = 3/2 : Print Gap for 2-ply copies
P2 = 3/3 : Print Gap for 3-ply copies
2
P2 = 3/4 : Print Gap for 4-ply copies )
P2 = 3/5 : Print Gap for 5-ply copies
P2 = 3/6 : Print Gap for 6-ply copies
P2 = 3/7 : Print Gap for 7-ply copies
1
P2 = 3/8 : Print Gap for 8-ply copies )
1
P2 = 3/9 : Print Gap for 9-ply copies )
1
2
) only for printer PP 803; ) PP 809 max 4 copies
Paper Exit:
P3 = 0 :
P3 = 1 or 2 :
P3 = 3 :
reserved
Paper Exit Front (manual)
Batch output (rear), default
3
Cut Mode On/Off: )
P4 = 0 : Cut Mode Off
P4 = 1 : Cut Mode On
P4 = 2 : Cut on actual position
(cutting edge is approximate 4 mm above the base of the actual line)
3
) only active if CUT DEVICE = YES
E-5
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC SO
Select Double Width for One Line
ESC SI
Select Condensed
10 cpi -> 17 cpi
12 cpi -> 20 cpi
15 cpi -> 15 cpi (unchanged)
proportional -> proportional cond.
ESC SP P1
Select Intercharacter Space
Unit 1/120" for DRAFT
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)
Unit 1/180" for NLQ/LQ
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)
ESC ! P1
Select Multiple Print Mode
P1 selects:
Bit 0 = 0 : 10 cpi (Pica)
Bit 0 = 1 : 12 cpi (Elite)
Bit 1 = 1 : proportional
Bit 2 = 1 : Condensed
Bit 3 = 1 : Emphasized
Bit 4 = 1 : Double Strike
Bit 5 = 1 : Double Width
Bit 6 = 1 : Italics
Bit 7 = 1 : Underline
ESC $ P1 P2
Set Absolute Horizontal Position
(P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/60"
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)
(P2 = 0/0...0/3)
Set Relative Horizontal Position
Draft:
(P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/120"
(P1 = 0/0...F/F) (P2 = 0/0...0/6)
NLQ/LQ: (P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/180"
(P1 = 0/0...F/F) (P2 = 0/0...0/3)
ESC \ P1 P2
ESC % P1
E-6
Select Standard / User Defined Character
Set
P1 = 0/0 : Standard Character Set
P1 = 0/1 : User Defined Character Set
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC & NUL P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 v1 .. vn
Define User Defined Characters
P1 = first code table position
(P1 = 0/0...P2)
P2 = last code table position
(P2 = P1...7/F)
P3 = front space
(P3 = 0/0...5/0)
P4 = body length
Draft: (P4 = 0/0...0/F)
LQ: (P4 = 0/0...2/5)
P5 = rear space
(P5 = 0/0...5/0)
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex
(vn = 0/0...F/F)
Notes:
This Command defines one or more characters in a RAM
character table.
$ All User Defined Characters are erased when the printer is
switched off.
$ Set the Interface Buffer to 1k or 8K (max 50 defined char in LQ,
128 in draft), or use a RAM card for up to 128 User Defined
Characters in LQ.
$ Set maximum every second dot to "1" in a horizontal line !
$ User Defined Characters can be defined in four different print
modes:
resolution (vertical x horizontal)
Normal Size with Draft:
24 x 15
Normal Size with LQ / proport.:
24 x 37
Sub-/ Superscript with Draft:
16 x 15
Sub-/ Superscript with LQ / proport.:
16 x 37
$ The characters can only be activated in the same mode as
defined.
$ The character layout is coded in three bytes (24 bit vertical) or two
bytes (16 bit vertical) per column, top to bottom.
$ To print the character change to the User Defined Character Set
with ESC % .
Examlpe:
vertical box, normal size with draft at code table position "41"
(P3=8, P4=5, P5=8)
hex: 1B 26 00 41 41 08 05 08 FF FF FF 00 00 00 80 00 01 00 00 00 FF FF FF
E-7
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ( - P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Select Line Marking
P1 = 0/3
(fixed value)
P2 = 0/0
(fixed value)
P3 = 0/1
(fixed value)
P4 = 0/1 : underline
P4 = 0/2 : strike through
P4 = 0/3 : overscore
P5 = 0/0 : cancel score line selected by P4
P5 = 0/1 : single continuous line
P5 = 0/2 : double continuous line
P5 = 0/5 : single broken line
P5 = 0/6 : double broken line
ESC 4
Set Italics
ESC 5
Cancel Italics
ESC <
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line)
ESC : NUL P1 NUL
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM
P1 = 0/0 : ROMAN
P1 = 0/1 : SANS SERIF
P1 = 0/2 : COURIER
P1 = 0/3 : PRESTIGE
P1 = 0/4 : SCRIPT
P1 = 0/5 : OCR-B
P1 = 0/6 : OCR-A
P1 = 0/7 : ORATOR-C
P1 = 0/8 : ORATOR
ESC - P1
Underline Printing
P1 = 0/1 : set Underline Printing
P1 = 0/0 : cancel Underline Printing
ESC D NUL
Clear Horizontal Tabs
E-8
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC D P1 P2 . . . P32 NUL
Set Horizontal Tabs
P1 ... P32 = tab position
(Pn = 0/1..F/F)
ESC E
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)
ESC F
Cancel Emphasized Printing
ESC G
Select Double Strike Printing (bold)
ESC H
Cancel Double Strike Printing
ESC M
Select Elite (12 cpi)
ESC P
Select Pica (10 cpi)
ESC Q P1
Set Right Margin
ESC S P1
Select Superscript/Subscript
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : select Superscript
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Subscript
ESC T
Cancel Superscript/Subscript
ESC U P1
Cancel/Select Unidirectional Printing
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel Unidirectional
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Unidirectional
ESC W P1
Cancel/Select Double Width
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel Double Width
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Double Width
ESC a P1
Select Justification
P1 = 0/0 : select left justification
P1 = 0/1 : center between margins
P1 = 0/2 : select right justification
P1 = 0/3 : select full justification
(P1 = 0/4 ... F/F)
E-9
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC g
Select Pitch 15 cpi
ESC k P1
Select Font
P1 = 0/0 : ROMAN
P1 = 0/1 : SANS SERIF
P1 = 0/2 : COURIER
P1 = 0/3 : PRESTIGE
P1 = 0/4 : SCRIPT
P1 = 0/5 : OCR-B
P1 = 0/6 : OCR-A
P1 = 0/7 : ORATOR-C
P1 = 0/8 : ORATOR
P1 = 1/1 : DATA LARGE
ESC l P1
Set Left Margin
ESC p P1
Cancel/Select Proportional
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel proportional
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select proportional
ESC q P1
Select Character Style
P1 = 0/0 : normal style
P1 = 0/1 : outline
P1 = 0/2 : shadow
P1 = 0/3 : outline + shadow
E-10
(P1 = 0/0...F/C)
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC w P1
Cancel/Select Double Height
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select
ESC x P1
Select Character Quality
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : select Draft
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select LQ or
NLQ dep. on set-up
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP B
Native Command,
GSM
Graphic Size Modification
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width
P1 = 2 0 0 / P2 = 2 0 0 : double height / width
P1 = 3 0 0 / P2 = 3 0 0 : triple height / width
P1 = 4 0 0 / P2 = 4 0 0 : quadruple height / width
P1 and P2 max. = 8 0 0 in steps of 100
Graphic Size Modification for DATA LARGE
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width
P1 and P2 max. 9 9 0 0 in steps of 100
E-11
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic Function
ESC [ P1 ; P2 x
Native Command,
CPL
Select Font and Character Pitch (any
parameter P1 or P2 may be skipped,
see following alternative command
sequences)
ESC [ P1 x
possible format of
Native Command CPL
P1 selects the font:
P1 = 0 or missing : Font is unchanged
P1 = 1 : DATA
P1 = 2 : ROMAN
P1 = 3 : SANS SERIF
P1 = 4 : COURIER
P1 = 5 : PRESTIGE
P1 = 6 : SCRIPT
P1 = 7 : OCR-B
P1 = 8 : OCR-A
P1 = 9 : ORATOR-C
P1 = 10 : ORATOR
P1 = 11 : DATA LARGE
ESC [ ; P2 x
possible format of
Native Command CPL
P2 selects the character pitch:
P2 = 0 or missing : Pitch is unchanged
P2 = 1 : 10 cpi
P2 = 2 : 12 cpi
P2 = 3 : 15 cpi
P2 = 4 : proportional
P2 = 5 : proportional
P2 = 6 : 14.4 cpi
P2 = 7 : 18 cpi
P2 = 8 : 17.1 cpi
P2 = 9 : 20 cpi
E-12
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 6: Graphics Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ? K P1
Reassign Graphics Mode K 1)
Standard Density, 8 dpc
ESC ? L P1
Reassign Graphics Mode L 1)
Double Density, 8 dot per column
ESC ? Y P1
Reassign Graphics Mode Y 1)
Double Density & -Speed, 8 dot per col.
ESC ? Z P1
Reassign Graphics Mode Z 1)
Quadruple Density, 8 dot per column
ESC K P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Standard Density Graphics Mode 1)
ESC L P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Double Density Graphics Mode 1)
ESC Y P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Double Density / Double Speed
Graphics Mode 1)
ESC Z P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode 1)
1)
: for coding of P1, P2, P3 see ESC * on the next page
E-13
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 6: (Cont.) Graphics Modes
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC * P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn
Select Various Graphics Modes
P2 + P3 * 256 = number of columns
(0/0...F/F)
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code
(0/0...F/F)
Parameter Table Graphic Density:
P1
0/0
0/1
0/2
0/3
0/4
0/6
2/0
2/1
2/6
2/7
2/8
Graphic type
Standard Density (K)
Double Density (L)
2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y)
Quadruple Density (Z)
CRT I
CRT II
Standard Density
Double Density
CRT III
Triple Density
Hex Density
dots /
column
8
8
8
8
8
8
24
24
24
24
24
max. number hor. density
of columns
( dpi )
816
60
1632
120
1632
120
3264
240
1088
80
1224
90
816
60
1632
120
1224
90
2448
180
4896
360
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.
Example:
E-14
box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density, 8 dots /
column
hex: 1B 2A 00 08 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF
*)
*)
*)
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 7: Character Set Selection
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC 6
Enlarge Print Code Area (128-159 dec.)
ESC 7
Enable Upper Control Code (128-159 dec.)
ESC R P1
Select National Version
P1 = 0/0 : U.S.A.
P1 = 0/1 : FRANCE
P1 = 0/2 : GERMANY
P1 = 0/3 : U.K.
P1 = 0/4 : DENMARK
P1 = 0/5 : SWEDEN
P1 = 0/6 : ITALY
P1 = 0/7 : SPAIN
P1 = 0/8 : JAPAN
P1 = 0/9 : NORWAY
P1 = 0/A : DENMARK 2
P1 = 0/B : SPAIN 2
P1 = 0/C : LATIN AM.
P1 = 0/D : TURKEY
P1 = 4/0 : LEGAL
ESC t P1
Select Character Table
P1 = 0/0 : Italics Character Table
P1 = 0/1 : Extended Graphics Character
Table
P1 = 0/2 : User Defined Character Table
E-15
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 8: ESC / P2 Commands
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ( c P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Set page format
Sets top and bottom margins in the defined
units.
P1 =
04 00
tm =
P2 + P3 x 256
tm: top margin in units tm
bm = P4 + P5 x 256
bm: bottom margin in units bm
ESC ( C P1 P2 P3
Set page length in defined unit
Define page length in units
P1 =
02 00
pl = P2 + P3 x 256
ESC ( V P1 P2 P3
Set absolute vertical print position
Define absolute vertical print position in units
P1 =
02 00
avpp = P2 + P3 x 256
avpp:
define print position from top
margin in defined units
ESC ( v P1 P2 P3
Set relative vertical print position
Define relative vertical print position in units
P1 =
02 00
rvpp = P2 + P3 x 256
rvpp: moves the print position in defined
units.
E-16
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC X P1 P2 P3
Select font by pitch and point
P1 = 0 : No change in pitch
P1 = 1 : Selects proportional spacing
P1 =
18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 60 or 72
Selects fixed pitch equal to 360/m
cpi
pz =
P2 + P3 x 256
pz:
Point size in 0,5 points; 1 point
equals 1/72 inch
pz = 0: No change in point size
pz =
16, 20, 21, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 42,
44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
ESC ( U P1 P2
Set unit
P1 =
01 00
P2 =
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 /3600"
P2 =
10; Standard
ESC c P1 P2
Set horizontal motion index (HMI)
Define HMI-Index
Change pitch value in n/360"-steps
HMI =
P1 + P2 x 256
HMI max. 3 inch
E-17
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ( t n1 n2 Pn P1 P2
Assign character table
n1 = 3, n2 = 0
Pn =
Parameter of ESC t : 0, 1, 2, 3, "0",
"1", "2" or "3"
P1 P2 = character table
0 0
: italic
1 0
: PC 437 (USA)
3 0
: PC 850 (Multilingual)
7 0
: PC 860 (Portugal)
8 0
: PC 863 (French-Canada)
9 0
: PC 865 (Norway)
29 15
: ISO 8859-15; LATIN 9
29 16
: ISO 8859-1, LATIN 1
44 0
: PC 858 (Multilingual + Euro)
The character table assigned by Pn is
one of the four tables which will be
selected by the ESC t command.
ESC t P1
Select character table
Selects the character table to be used
for printing from among the four
character tables which are assigned by
ESC ( t command.
Pn = 0/0 or 3/0 : Character Table 0
Pn = 0/1 or 3/1 : Character Table 1
Pn = 0/2 or 3/2 : Character Table 2
Re-maps downloaded Characters
from the positions 0 to 127 to the
positions 128 to 255.
Pn = 0/3 or 3/3 : Character Table 3
Default Setting
Pn = 0/0 or 3/0 : Italics Character Table
Pn = 0/1 or 3/1 : CP 437
Pn = 0/2 or 3/2 : User Defined Character
Table
Pn = 0/3 or 3/3 : CP 437
E-18
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ( ^ P1 P2
Print data as characters
Prints n data bytes as characters, not control
codes
pd = P1 + P2 x 256
ESC ( G P1 P2
Select graphics mode
P1 =
01 00
P2 =
1 or 49
Graphics mode may be reset by ESC @.
ESC . P1 P2 P 3 P4 P5 P6
Print raster graphics
P1 = 0 : graphics mode non compressed
P1 = 1 : graphics mode compressed
P2 = 10, 20 : vertical resolution in 3600/v DPI
P3 = 10, 20 : horizontal resolution in 3600/h
DPI
P4 :
vertical dot count (rows of dot
graphics) 1 < P4 < 24
hzd :
horizont dot count (columns of dot
graphics)
hzd =
P5 + P6 x 256
Combination P2 = 10, P3 = 20 is not possible.
E-19
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 9: EPSON Barcodes Commands
Escape Sequence
Function
ESC ( B P1 P2 k m s v1 v2 c BarCodeData Specify and Print barcode
P1 P2 number of data bytes to follow:
6 bytes + number of BarCodeData
= P1 + P2 x 256
k specifies the barcode type:
k = 0/2 Interleaved 2 of 5
k = 0/5 Code 39
k = 06 Code 128
m specifies the module width (unit 1/180 inch)
m = 0/2 2 dots (default)
m = 0/3 3 dots
m = 0/4 4 dots
m = 0/5 5 dots
s specifies the space adjustment value
(unit 1/360 inch)
-3 <= s <= 3 (F/D <= s <= 0/3)
v1 and v2 specifies the bar length (v1+v2x256)
(unit 1/180 inch)
range : 45/180 inch <= bar legth <= 8.25 inch
c specifies the control flag
bit 0 : Check digit
0: host generates check digit
1: printer generates check digit
bit 1 : human readable character
0: print hr character ; 1: no print of character
bit 2 to bit 7 : reserved
Actual number of barcode data
Interleaved 2 of 5 : 2 .. 255
Code 39 :
1 .. 255
Code 128 :
2 .. 255
Valid range of BarCodeData
Interleaved 2 of 5 : 0 9 (30H 39H)
Code 39
: 0 9 (30H 39H),
(41H - 5AH) (20H, 24H, 25H, 2BH, 2DH, 2EH,
2FH)
Code 128 : uses the code sets A, B, and C
Code sets A, B, and C:
Code set A
Data characters
x00 x5F
Code A
Code B
x64
Code C
x63
Shift
x62
FNC 1
x66
FNC 2
x61
FNC 3
x60
FNC 4
x65
E-20
Code set B
x20 - x7F
x1E
x1C
x1B
x1F
x1A
x19
x1D
Code Set C
x30 x39
x3B
x3A
x3C
-
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 10: Further Control Sequences, supported by
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
$$
$$
Control String Introducer (CSI) for ESC [
$$/
$$/
control String Introducer for ESC
ESC [ < s
EJF
Eject Form; this command causes a
vertical form feed to the beginning of the
next page.
ESC [ > s
IF
Insert Form
ESC [ P1 SP X
SPQ
Select Print Quality
P1 = 0: LQ
P1 = 1: NLQ; this is only valid if the NLQ
type style is selected.
P1 = 2: DRAFT
P1 = 3: HSD (high speed draft)
Note:
The LQ / NLQ selection becomes active if
a LQ-/ NLQ-font is selected.
Draft / HSD becomes active if type style
DATA is selected.
SM #
Select Macro and Change Emulation
P1 = 1: Macro 1
P1 = 2: Macro 2
P1 = 3: Macro 3
P1 = 4: Macro 4
P2 = 0: no change of emulation
P2 = 2: IBM ProPrinter Emulation
P2 = 3: IBM ProPrinter AGM Emulation
P2 = 4: EPSON Emulation
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP r
E-21
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 10 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ P1 ; P2 w
SNVCT
Set National Version and Code Table
P1 = 1 - 15 national version depending on
selected character set (see Appendix C Char.
Set Tables)
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table (see
command SCT below)
P1 for national version EPSON EXT. GCT:
P1 = 1 : U.S.A
P1 = 2 : France
P1 = 3 : Germany
P1 = 4 : U.K.
P1 = 5 : Denmark
P1 = 6 : Sweden
P1 = 7 : Italy
P1 = 8 : Spain
P1 = 9 : Japan
P1 = 1 0 : Norway
P1 = 1 1 : Denmark 2
P1 = 1 2 : Spain 2
P1 = 1 3 : Latin AM
P1 = 1 4 : Turkey
P1 = 1 5 : Legal
P1 for IBM CODE PAGE:
P1 for CODE PAGE EE:
P1 = 1 : CP 437
P1 = 2 : CP 850
P1 = 3 : CP 860
P1 = 4 : CP 863
P1 = 5 : CP 865
P1 = 6 : CP 858
P1 = 1 : CP 437 GK
P1 = 2 : CP 851 GK
P1 = 3 : CP 928 GK
P1 = 4 : CP 855 CYRI
P1 = 5 : CP 866
P1 = 6 : CP 869
P1 = 7 : CP 852
P1 = 8 : KAMENICKY
P1 = 9 : ISO LATIN 2
P1 = 1 0 : MAZOVIA
P1 = 1 1 : CP 437 HUN
P1 = 1 2 : CP 852 SEE
P1 = 1 3 : CP 866 LAT
P1 = 1 4 : WIN LAT2
P1 for CODE PAGE EE2:
P1 = 1 : CP 771
P1 = 2 : CP 773
P1 = 3 : CP 774
P1 = 4 : CP 775
P1 = 5 : CP BALTIC RIM
ESC [ ; P2 w
SCT
Set Code Table
P2 = 3 bit code of the code table
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/1; LATIN 1
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/15; LATIN 9
P2 = 0 6 1 : IBM Set 1
P2 = 0 6 2 : IBM Set 2
P2 = 0 6 3 : IBM Code Page 1)
P2 = 0 7 1 : EPSON Ext. G. C. T
P2 = 1 0 0 : CODE PAGES EE
P2 = 1 0 1 : CODE PAGES EE2
1) depending on selected character set (P1 in SNV) the IBM CODE PAGE 437, 850,
860, 863, 865, or 858 (P1 = 6; P2 = 63) will be activated!
E-22
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Table 10 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)
Escape Sequence
Mnemonic
Function
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 SP z
see Appendix F
BH
Barcode Header
BARCODE Programming
P2: Barcode type
P3: Height of barcode
P4: Width of the thin bars
P5: Width of the thin gaps
P6: Ratio width to thin (bars / gaps)
P7: Uni-directional or bi-directional
printing
0 : or not programmed: means no
changes
1 : uni-directional printing in LQ
2 : bi-directional printing in LQ
3 : uni-directional printing in NLQ
4 : bi-directional printing in NLQ
ESC [ ? 0 h
SMBC
Set Mode Barcode
ESC [ ? 0 l
RSBC
Reset Mode Barcode
E-23
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Hex Code
Format
Page
00
Null
E-2
08
Backspace
E-2
09
Horizontal Tab
E-2
0A
Line Feed
E-2
0B
Vertical Tab
E-2
0C
Form Feed
E-2
0D
Cariage Return
E-2
11
Select Printer
E-2
12
Cancel Condensed Mode
E-2
13
Deselect Printer
E-2
14
Cancel Double Width
E-2
18
Cancel Buffer
E-2
1B
Escape
E-2
20
Space
E-2
7F
Delete
E-2
E-2/6
1B 0E
or
0E
Select Double Width for One Line
1B 0F
or
0F
Select Condensed Mode
E-2/6
1B 23
Cancel Most Significant Bit Control
E-2
1B 30
Set Line Space to 1/8 "
E-3
1
1B 32
Set Line Space to /6 "
E-3
1B 34
Set Italics
E-8
1B 35
Cancel Italics
E-8
1B 36
Enlarge Print Code Area
E-15
1B 37
Enable Upper Control Code Area
E-15
1B 3C
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line)
E-8
1B 3D
Set Most Significant Bit to 0
E-2
1B 3E
Set Most Significant Bit to 1
E-2
1B 40
Initialize Printer
E-2
1B 45
Select Emphasized (bold)
E-9
1B 46
Cancel Emphasized
E-9
E-24
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Hex Code
Format
Page
1B 47
Select Double Strike (bold)
E-9
1B 48
Cancel Double Strike
E-9
1B 4D
Select Elite (12 cpi)
E-9
1B 4F
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip
E-3
1B 50
Select Pica (10 cpi)
E-9
1B 54
Cancel Superscript/Subscript
E-9
1B 67
Select Pitch 15 cpi
E-10
24 24
Control String Introducer for ESC [
E-21
24 24 2F
Control String Introducer for ESC
E-21
1B 19 P1
Form Feed
E-4
1B 20 P1
Select Intercharacter Space
E-6
1B 21 P1
Select Multible Print Mode
E-6
1B 25 00
/
1B 25 01
Select Standard- / User Defined Char. E-6
Set
1B 2B P1
Set line Space to P1/360 "
E-3
1B 2E P1
Select Variable Tab Channel
E-4
Select / Cancel Underline
E-8
1B 2D 01
/
1B 2D 00
1B 33 P1
Set Line Space to
P1
P1
/180 "
/60 "
E-3
1B 41 P1
Set line Space to
1B 42 00
Clear Vertical Tabs
E-3
1B 43 P1
Set Form Length in Lines
E-3
1B 44 00
Clear Horizontal Tabs
E-8
P1
/180 Line Feed
E-3
1B 4A P1
Perform
E-3
1B 4E P1
Set Automatic Perforation Skip
E-3
1B 51 P1
Set Right Margin
E-9
1B 52 P1
Set National Version
E-15
E-9
1B 53 00
/
1B 53 01
Select Superscript / Subscript
1B 55 00
/
1B 55 01
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing E-9
1B 57 00
/
1B 57 01
Cancel / Select Double Width
E-9
Select Justification
E-9
1B 61 P1
E-25
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Hex Code
Format
Page
1B 6A P1
Perform P1/180 Reverse Line Feed
E-4
1B 6B P1
Select Font
E-10
1B 6C P1
Set Left Margin
E-10
Cancel / Select Proportional
E-10
1B 71 P1
Select Character Style
E-10
1B 74 P1
Select Character Table
E-15
E-18
Cancel / Select Double Height
E-11
1B 78 P1
Select Character Quality
E-11
1B 24 P1 P2
Set Absolute Horizontal Position
E-6
1B 26 00 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 data
Define User Defined Characters
E-7
1B 28 2D P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Select Line Marking
E-8
1B 28 42 P1 P2 k m s v1 v2 c bcdata
Select and Print Barcode
E-20
1B 28 43 P1 P2 P3
Set Page Length in defined Unit
E-16
1B 28 47 P1 P2
Select Graphics Mode
E-19
1B 28 55 P1 P2
Set Unit
E-17
1B 28 56 P1 P2 P3
Set absolute vertical Print Position
E-16
1B 28 63 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Set Page Format
E-16
1B 28 74 P1 P2 P3 P4
Assign Character Table
E-18
1B 28 76 P1 P2 P3
Set relative vertical Print Position
E-16
1B 28 5E P1 P2
Print Data as Character
E-19
1B 2A P1 P2 P3 data
Select Various Graphics Modes
E-14
1B 2E P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Print Raster Graphics
E-19
1B 3A 00 P1 00
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM
E-8
1B 3E 4B P1
Reassign Graphics Mode K
E-13
1B 3E 4C P1
Reassign Graphics Mode L
E-13
1B 3E 59 P1
Reassign Graphics Mode Y
E-13
1B 3E 5A P1
Reassign Graphics Mode Z
E-13
1B 42 P1....P16 00
Set Vertical Tabs
E-3
1B 43 00 P1
Set form Length in Inches
E-3
1B 70 00
1B 77 00
E-26
/
/
1B 70 01
1B 77 01
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Hex Code
Format
Page
1B 44 P1 P2...P32 00
Set Horizontal Tabs
E-9
1B 4B P2 P3 data
Standard Density Graphics Mode
E-13
1B 4C P2 P3 data
Double Density Graphics Mode
E-13
1B 58 P1 P2 P3
Select Font by Pitch and Point
E-13
1B 59 P2 P3 data
Double Speed & Double Density Graph. Mode
E-13
1B 5A P2 P3 data
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode
E-13
1B 5B 3B P2 73
AGC / PCC Procedure
E-5
1B 5B 3B P2 77
Set Code Table
E-22
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 3B P5 3B
P6 3B P7 20 7A
Barcode Printing
E-23
1B 5B 3C 73
Eject Form
E-21
1B 5B 3E 73
Insert Form
E-21
1B 5B 3E P1 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 73
Select Paper Source and Insert Form
E-4
1B 5B 3E 30 68
Set Mode Barcode
E-23
1B 5B 3E 30 6C
Reset Mode Barcode
E-23
1B 5B P1 20 58
Select Print Quality
E-21
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 72
Select Makro and Change Emulation
E-21
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 42
Graphic Size Modification
E-11
1B 5B P1 3B P2 77
Set National Version and Code Table
E-22
1B 5B P1 3B P2 78
Select Font and Character Pitch
E-12
1B 5B P1 77
Set National Version
E-22
1B 5C P1 P2
Set Relative Horizontal Position
E-6
1B 62 P1 00
Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel P1
E-4
1B 62 m P1 P2...P9 00
Set Vertical Tab in Channel P1
E-4
1B 63 P1 P2
Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)
E-17
E-27
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550, ESC/P2, and Barcodes Quick Reference
Hex - Decimal Conversion Table
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
1
1
17
33
49
65
81
97
113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241
2
2
18
34
50
66
82
98
114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242
3
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243
4
4
20
36
52
68
84
100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244
5
5
21
37
53
69
85
101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245
6
6
22
38
54
70
86
102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246
7
7
23
39
55
71
87
103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247
8
8
24
40
56
72
88
104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248
9
9
25
41
57
73
89
105 121 137 153 269 185 201 217 233 249
A
10
26
42
58
74
90
106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250
B
11
27
43
59
75
91
107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251
C
12
28
44
60
76
92
108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252
D
13
29
45
61
77
93
109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253
E
14
30
46
62
78
94
110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254
F
15
31
47
63
79
95
111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255
E-28
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Appendix F
Barcode Quick Reference
1. Introduction
The barcode print facility is available in all three emulations.
2. Programming
There are three escape sequences to print barcodes
- The first sequence is to define the Barcode Header. The type of barcode as
well as all parameters are selected by a header. The header does not affect
any parameters outside the barcode application and remains valid until
another header is transmitted or the printer is turned off. This can be done at
any time but before barcode printing.
The header has the following format:
z
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
Note:
= Space
- In step two, the ESC-sequence "Set Mode Barcode (SMBC)" starts the
barcode printing.
ESC [ ? 0 h
- Finally, the ESC-sequence "Reset Mode Barcode (RMBC)" will stop printing.
ESC [ ? 0 l
Note:
Between SMBC and RMBC are only printable characters tolerated (no CR
or LF).
2.1
Barcode Header
Format
Function/Parameter
Hex Code
BH
Barcode Header
P2 = Barcode type;
P3 = Height of barcode;
P4 = Width of thin bars;
P5 = Width of thin gaps;
P6 = Ratio width to height;
P7 = Uni/Bidirectional printing
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 3B P5 3B
P6 3B P7 20 7A
SMBC
Start of Barcode
1B 5B 3F 30 68
RMBC
Stop Barcode
1B 5B 3F 30 6C
F-1
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Header Parameters
P2
Barcode type
- default = 101 (Code 39 horizontal)
Type
horizontal
horizontal +
human
readable text
vertical
vertical +
human
readable text
Code 39
101
201
301
401
2 of 5 industrial
102
202
302
402
2 or 5 interleaved
103
203
303
403
Codabar (Monarch)
104
204
304
404
EAN 8
105
205
not applicable not applicable
EAN 13
106
206
not applicable not applicable
Code 93
107
207
307
407
MSI Mod 10/10
108
208
308
408
UPC-E
109
209
not applicable not applicable
UPC-A
110
210
not applicable not applicable
Code 128 (EAN 128)
111
Postnet
112
not applicable not applicable not applicable
KIX RM4SCC, U.K.
113
not applicable not applicable not applicable
211
311
411
P3
Height of barcode
default: 3/12" - 0.64 cm
All characters in a line are automatically repeated according to the selected
barcode height. This is also true for plain text!
- P3 * 1/12"
- possible values from:
0 to 40 (30H to 34H30H) or (48D to 52D48D) for vertical barcodes
0 to 99 (30H to 39H39H) or (48D to 57D57D) for horizontal barcodes
Barcode
Code 39
Codabar
Code 93
Code 128
F-2
Height in % of barcode length
minimum height in mm
25
25
15
15
20 (0.8")
20 (0.8")
6.25 (0.25")
6.25 (0.25")
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
P4
Width of the thin bars (default: 2/144" = 0.35 mm)
Note:
The width of bars and gaps should be equal. For this, the parameters P4
and P5 should not deviate more than one step.
for horizontal Barcode
P4
hex
dec
inch
mm
0
30
48
2/144
0,35
1
31
49
3/144
0,53
2
32
50
4/144
0,70
3
33
51
5/144
0,88
4
34
52
6/144
1,05
5
35
53
7/144
1,23
6
36
54
8/144
1,41
7
37
55
9/144
1,58
for vertical Barcode
P5
P4
hex
dec
inch
mm
0
30
48
2/180
0,28
1
31
49
3/180
0,42
2
32
50
4/180
0,56
3
33
51
5/180
0,70
4
34
52
6/180
0,85
5
35
53
7/180
0,99
6
36
54
8/180
1,12
7
37
55
9/180
1,27
Width of the thin gaps (default: 2/144" = 0.35 mm)
The values are the same as in P4
F-3
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
P6 Ratio Width to Thin (default: 0 (2 to 1))
value
Code 39
2 of 5 industrial
2 of 5 interleaved
Codabar
Code 93
MSI mod 10/10
Code 128
EAN 8
EAN 13
UPC-A
UPC-E
0
2.0 to 1
SC3
1
2.5 to 1
SC6
2
3.0 to 1
SC9
3
3.5 to 1
SC3
P6
Note:
Code 93, MSI 10/10, Code 128 are fixed 2.0 to 1
Best results for Code 39, 2 of 5 industrial, 2 of 5 interleaved, and Codabar
with 2.5 to 1
P7
Uni-directional or bi-directional printing - standard 0 uni-directional
values are:
0 or not programmed means no changes
1 uni-directional printing in LQ
2 bi-directional printing in LQ
3 uni-directional printing in NLQ
4 bi-directional printing in NLQ
Start Position of Barcode Printing
The start position for barcode printing is the current print position.
For both horizontal and vertical printing, the print position after printing
barcodes is the same line as the start position next to the barcode printed.
F-4
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
2.2
Barcode Programming Examples
Note:
All examples are coded in standard uni-directional printing - that means
the parameter "P7" is not used.
In the following examples, stands for "Space".
The read square
before and after the printed barcode indicates the
actual print position.
Between Start Barcode and Stop Barcode are only printable characters
tolerated (no CR or LF).
Barcode Example for Code 39
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
* C
ESC
[ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
[ ; 201 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1 ;
z
[ ? 0 h
O
D
E
3 9 *
[ ? 0 l
Barcode Example for 2 of 5 Industrial
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
: 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
202 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ;
0 l
F-5
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for 2 of 5 Interleaved
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
: 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
203 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ;
0 l
Barcode Example for Codabar (Monarch)
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-6
ESC
ESC
ESC
a 0
ESC
[
[
[
1
[
;
;
?
2
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
204 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1 ;
z
0 h
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t
0 l
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for EAN 8
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 0
ESC
[
[
[
1
[
;
;
?
2
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
205 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
3 4 5 5
0 l
Barcode Example for EAN 8 ADD-2
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 0
ESC
[
[
[
1
[
;
;
?
2
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
205 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
3 4 5 5 1 2
0 l
F-7
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for EAN 8 ADD-5
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 0
ESC
[
[
[
1
[
;
;
?
2
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
205 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
3 4 5 5 8 6 1 0 4
0 l
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
206 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8
0 l
Barcode Example for EAN 13
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-8
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for EAN 13 ADD-2
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
206 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8 1 2
0 l
Barcode Example for EAN 13 ADD-5
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
4 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
206 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8 8 6 1 0 4
0 l
F-9
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for Code 93
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
a C
ESC
[
[
[
+
[
;
;
?
O
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
207 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ;
;
z
0 h
+ D + E
9 3 W I e
0 l
Barcode Example for MSI Mod 10/10
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-10
ESC
ESC
ESC
: 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
208 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ;
;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 4 1 ;
0 l
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for UPC-E
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
209 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 5
0 l
Barcode Example for UPC-E ADD-2
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
209 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 5 1 2
0 l
F-11
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for UPC-E ADD-5
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
209 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 5 8 6 1 0 4
0 l
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
210 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5
0 l
Barcode Example for UPC-A
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-12
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for UPC-A ADD-2
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
210 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 1 2
0 l
Barcode Example for UPC-A ADD-5
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
0 1
ESC
[
[
[
2
[
;
;
?
3
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
210 ; 8 ;
;
; 1 ;
z
0 h
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 8 6 1 0 4
0 l
F-13
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for Code 128
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
C o
ESC
[
[
[
d
[
;
;
?
e
?
z
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
211 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ;
;
z
0 h
1 2 8
0 l
Barcode Example for Code 128 using FNC1 = Coding ] C 1
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-14
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
ESC [ ; 211 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ;
;
z
ESC [ ? 0 h
] C 1 0 0 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5
ESC [ ? 0 l
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Barcode Example for POSTNET
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
Data:
z
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
ESC [ ; 112 ;
;
;
;
;
z
ESC [ ? 0 h
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
ESC [ ? 0 l
CR LF LF
Mark Pollan CR LF
101 Main St CR LF
Anytown US 12345-6789
Mark Pollan
101 main St
Anytown US 12345-6789
Barcode Example for KIX - PTT, Post Nederland (Klant IndeX)
RM4SCC, U.K. (Royal Mail 4 State Customer Code)
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC
ESC
ESC
1 2
ESC
[
[
[
3
[
;
;
?
4
?
P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
z
113 ;
;
;
;
;
z
0 h
5 6 7 8 9 0
0 l
F-15
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Programming two Barcodes symbols on the same line
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
Blank zone
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-16
ESC
ESC
ESC
* C
ESC
z
[ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
[ ; 201 ; 7 ; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ;
z
[ ? 0 h
O
D
E
3 9 *
[ ? 0 l
ESC [ ? 0 h
* C
O
D
E
3 9 *
ESC [ ? 0 l
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Programming two Barcodes symbols separated by CR and LF
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
Blank zone:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
ESC [
ESC [
ESC [
* C
ESC [
CR LF
ESC [
* C
ESC [
z
; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
; 201 ; 7 ; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ;
z
? 0 h
O
D
E
3 9 *
? 0 l
LF LF LF LF LF LF
? 0 h
O
D
E
3 9 *
? 0 l
F-17
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Programming two Barcodes symbols in landscape on the same line
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
Blank zone:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
F-18
ESC
ESC
ESC
* C
ESC
z
[ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
[ ; 401 ; 7 ; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ;
z
[ ? 0 h
O
D
E
3 9 *
[ ? 0 l
ESC [ ? 0 h
* C
O
D
E
3 9 *
ESC [ ? 0 l
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference
Programming two Barcodes symbols in landscape separated by CR / LF
Barcode Header:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
Blank zone:
Start Barcode:
Data:
Stop Barcode:
z
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7
ESC [ ; 401 ; 7 ; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ;
z
ESC [ ? 0 h
* C
O
D
E
3 9 *
ESC [ ? 0 l
CR LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF
ESC [ ? 0 h
*C O D E
39*
ESC [ ? 0 l
F-19
Appendix G
Information for the System Manager
Reset off Menu Access
To reactivate the menu access function, perform the following steps:
$ Switch off the printer. Press the
and
keys simultaneously. While
holding down the two keys, switch on the printer. When the message MENU
ACCESS (MENUEZUGRIFF / ACCESS AU MENU) is displayed, release the
keys. Now you are able to change the menu access function. If the new
setting is supposed to be permanent, don't forget the SAVE function.
Printer drivers
The printer drivers for Windows 3.x, 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP, NT 4.0 are available.
See CD-ROM or www.psi-si.de / window.html, resp.
G-1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement